02.07.2014 Views

Owner's Manual Cadillac BLS - IFS Europe BV

Owner's Manual Cadillac BLS - IFS Europe BV

Owner's Manual Cadillac BLS - IFS Europe BV

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

460_OM_MY09.book Page 1 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

1<br />

Owner’s <strong>Manual</strong><br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> <strong>BLS</strong><br />

Safety 15<br />

Locks and car alarm 45<br />

Instruments and controls 61<br />

Interior equipment 95<br />

Starting and driving 123<br />

Car care 173<br />

Technical data 235<br />

Index 255<br />

© Copyright General Motors Corporation 2008<br />

All Rights Reserved<br />

Printed in Sweden


460_OM_MY09.book Page 2 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

2<br />

Introduction<br />

This manual provides practical guidance on<br />

driving and caring for your <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

Although this manual describes the most<br />

important differences between model variants,<br />

it does not include their precise specifications.<br />

Some differences also occur to<br />

meet national legal requirements.<br />

This manual contains important warning<br />

texts that must always be observed:<br />

WARNING<br />

WARNING texts warn against the danger<br />

of injury if the specified instructions are<br />

not followed.<br />

NOTICE<br />

NOTICE texts warn of potential damage<br />

to your car if the recommendations are<br />

not followed.<br />

We recommend that you read through this<br />

manual before taking the car out for the first<br />

time and that you keep it in the car for future<br />

reference.<br />

Finding your way around this manual is<br />

simple. To find a specific item, use the<br />

search pages at the start of the manual.<br />

A list of contents is provided at the beginning<br />

of each section and there is a comprehensive<br />

alphabetical index at the back of<br />

the manual.<br />

A Warranty and Service Book is supplied<br />

when the car is delivered. This specifies<br />

the regular maintenance to be carried out<br />

and also contains important information on<br />

warranty conditions.<br />

Since the policy at <strong>Cadillac</strong> is one of continual<br />

improvement, we retain the right to<br />

incorporate modifications and to alter specifications<br />

during production without prior<br />

notice.<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all<br />

cars (can depend on model variant, engine<br />

variant, market specification, options or<br />

accessories).<br />

An authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> dealer would be<br />

glad to help with any queries you may have<br />

concerning your car’s functions, care,<br />

warranty, etc.<br />

Best wishes,<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> does not assume responsibility for any<br />

damage that may arise from the use of spare<br />

parts, replacement parts or accessories that have<br />

not been approved by <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

The specifications, design particulars and illustrations<br />

included in the manual are not binding.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 3 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instrument panel, LHD<br />

Settings _____________________ 75<br />

DIC ________________________ 71<br />

Fuel gauge___________________ 70<br />

Speedometer_________________ 69<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

Warning and indicator lights _____ 62<br />

Rev counter __________________ 69<br />

Milometer and trip meter ________ 71<br />

3<br />

Direction indicators _______ 81<br />

Cruise control ___________ 144<br />

Dip switch ______________ 78<br />

Rear fog light ____________ 80<br />

Front fog lights___________ 81<br />

Main/dipped beam________ 78<br />

Changing bulbs __________ 190<br />

Headlight levelling ________ 79<br />

Position lights ___________ 78<br />

Dim-dipped beam ________ 78<br />

Changing wiper blades ____ 188<br />

Wash/wipe _____________ 83<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

Automatic climate control __ 87<br />

Car care and maintenance _ 233<br />

Seat heating ____________ 93<br />

Hazard warning lights_____ 82<br />

Ashtray _____________________ 107<br />

Cigarette lighter _______________ 107


460_OM_MY09.book Page 4 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

4<br />

Instrument panel, RHD Fuel gauge___________________ 70<br />

Speedometer_________________ 69<br />

Settings _____________________ 75<br />

DIC ________________________ 71<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

Warning and indicator lights _____ 62<br />

Rev counter __________________ 69<br />

Milometer and trip meter ________ 71<br />

Direction indicators _______ 81<br />

Cruise control ___________ 144<br />

Dip switch ______________ 78<br />

Changing wiper blades ____ 188<br />

Wash/wipe _____________ 83<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

Automatic climate control __ 87<br />

Car care and maintenance _ 233<br />

Seat heating ____________ 93<br />

Hazard warning lights _____ 82<br />

Rear fog light ___________ 80<br />

Front fog lights __________ 81<br />

Main/dipped beam _______ 78<br />

Changing bulbs__________ 190<br />

Headlight levelling _______ 79<br />

Position lights ___________ 78<br />

Dim-dipped beam ________ 78<br />

Ashtray _____________________ 107<br />

Cigarette lighter _______________ 107


460_OM_MY09.book Page 5 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Exterior<br />

Body __________________ 230<br />

Touching up paintwork_____ 230<br />

Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 231<br />

Service programme_______ 232<br />

Sunroof ________________ 102<br />

Washing _______________ 228<br />

Waxing and polishing _____ 230<br />

Tail lights _______________ 198<br />

Brake lights _____________ 198<br />

Changing bulbs __________ 190<br />

Light switches ___________ 78<br />

Luggage compartment ____ 110<br />

Lighting ________________ 198<br />

Folding down the rear seat _ 110<br />

Load-through hatch _______ 111<br />

Spare wheel ____________ 113<br />

Tools __________________ 113<br />

Towing _________________ 167<br />

Towing eyes_____________ 167<br />

Towing a caravan or trailer__ 163<br />

Maximum loads _______________ 236<br />

Mounting holes for roof carriers ___ 166<br />

Roof load ____________________ 166<br />

Braking _____________________ 146<br />

Tyres _______________________ 210<br />

Tyre pressure ________________ 245<br />

Wheels______________________ 241<br />

Changing wheels ______________ 219<br />

Spare wheel__________________ 216<br />

Winter driving_________________ 160<br />

5<br />

Bonnet ______________________ 174<br />

Washing the engine bay_________ 230<br />

Front lights _____________ 193<br />

Direction indicators_______ 81<br />

Changing bulbs__________ 190<br />

Headlight levelling _______ 79<br />

Dip switch ______________ 78<br />

Headlight switches _______ 78<br />

Headlight washers _______ 189<br />

Central locking __________ 46<br />

Luggage compartment<br />

lock __________________ 50<br />

Lock buttons ____________ 46<br />

Child safety locks ________ 51<br />

Fuel grade _____________ 239<br />

Fuel gauge _____________ 70<br />

Economical motoring _____ 158<br />

Fuel filler flap ___________ 133<br />

Refuelling ______________ 133


460_OM_MY09.book Page 6 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

6<br />

Interior<br />

Interior rear view mirror _________ 101<br />

Vanity mirror _________________ 106<br />

Door mirrors__________________ 100<br />

Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___ 202<br />

Interior light switches ___________ 105<br />

Sunroof _____________________ 102<br />

Airbag _________________ 34<br />

Steering wheel adjustment _ 96<br />

Airbag_________________ 34<br />

Child seats _____________ 27<br />

Seat belts ______________ 16<br />

Seat belt care ___________ 227<br />

Child safety locks ________ 51<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Glove compartment ______ 108<br />

Storage compartments ____ 108<br />

Electric windows _________ 97<br />

Automatic transmission ___ 138<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox _________ 137<br />

Changing gears _________ 137<br />

Rear seat____________________ 110<br />

Child seats __________________ 27<br />

Seat belts ___________________ 16<br />

Folding down the rear seat ______ 110<br />

Upholstery care _______________ 228<br />

Seat adjustment ______________ 21<br />

Seat heating _________________ 93<br />

Running-in ___________________ 137<br />

Driving in hot/cold climates ______ 160<br />

Parking _____________________ 153<br />

Starting the engine ____________ 126<br />

Ignition switch ________________ 124<br />

Handbrake ___________________ 152


460_OM_MY09.book Page 7 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Engine bay,<br />

turbo petrol engine<br />

Engine: description ____________ 175<br />

Engine oil: topping up __________ 180<br />

Engine: technical data __________ 238<br />

Important considerations for<br />

driving______________________ 129<br />

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 182<br />

Driving in hot climates __________ 162<br />

Radiator_____________________ 238<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

7<br />

Vehicle identification<br />

number________________ 247<br />

Colour code_____________ 247<br />

Engine number __________ 247<br />

Warning labels___________ 11<br />

Gearbox number _________ 247<br />

ABS brakes_____________ 146<br />

Braking lining ___________ 184<br />

Brake system ___________ 240<br />

Brake fluid______________ 184<br />

Exhaust emission control __ 130<br />

Drive belt _______________ 188<br />

Simple troubleshooting<br />

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 233<br />

Alternator_______________ 188<br />

Spark plugs _____________ 240<br />

Ignition system __________ 240<br />

Engine oil: checking level __ 180<br />

Changing a fuse _________ 204<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Relays ________________ 208<br />

Fuse table______________ 208<br />

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 83<br />

Topping-up fluid _________ 189<br />

Washer jets_____________ 190<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

Automatic transmission _________ 138<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox_______________ 137<br />

Power steering________________ 185<br />

Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 185<br />

Battery ______________________ 186<br />

Battery charge ________________ 186<br />

Jump starting _________________ 170


460_OM_MY09.book Page 8 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

8<br />

Engine bay,<br />

petrol engine V6<br />

Engine: description ____________ 177<br />

Engine oil: topping up __________ 180<br />

Engine: technical data __________ 238<br />

Important considerations for<br />

driving______________________ 129<br />

Cooling system, coolant capacity__ 238<br />

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 182<br />

Driving in hot climates __________ 162<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

Power steering___________ 185<br />

Fluid: checking/topping up__ 185<br />

Vehicle identification<br />

number________________ 247<br />

Colour code_____________ 247<br />

Engine number __________ 247<br />

Warning labels___________ 11<br />

Gearbox number _________ 247<br />

Exhaust emission control __ 130<br />

Drive belt _______________ 188<br />

Simple troubleshooting<br />

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 233<br />

Alternator_______________ 188<br />

Spark plugs _____________ 240<br />

Ignition system __________ 240<br />

ABS brakes_____________ 146<br />

Braking lining ___________ 184<br />

Brake system ___________ 240<br />

Brake fluid______________ 184<br />

Changing a fuse _________ 204<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Relays ________________ 208<br />

Fuse table______________ 208<br />

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 83<br />

Topping-up fluid _________ 188<br />

Washer jets_____________ 190<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

Automatic transmission _________ 138<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox_______________ 137<br />

Engine oil: checking level________ 180<br />

Battery ______________________ 186<br />

Battery charge ________________ 186<br />

Jump starting _________________ 170


460_OM_MY09.book Page 9 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Engine bay,<br />

diesel engine TiD 3<br />

Vehicle identification<br />

number________________ 247<br />

Colour code_____________ 247<br />

Engine number __________ 247<br />

Warning labels___________ 11<br />

Gearbox number _________ 247<br />

Engine: description ____________ 175<br />

Engine oil: topping up __________ 180<br />

Engine: technical data __________ 238<br />

Important considerations for<br />

driving______________________ 129<br />

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 182<br />

Driving in hot climates __________ 162<br />

Radiator_____________________ 238<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

9<br />

ABS brakes_____________ 146<br />

Braking lining ___________ 184<br />

Brake system ___________ 240<br />

Brake fluid______________ 184<br />

Exhaust emission control __ 130<br />

Drive belt _______________ 188<br />

Simple troubleshooting<br />

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 233<br />

Alternator_______________ 188<br />

Changing a fuse _________ 204<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Relays ________________ 208<br />

Fuse table______________ 208<br />

Engine oil: checking level __ 180<br />

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 83<br />

Topping-up fluid _________ 189<br />

Washer jets_____________ 190<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox_______________ 137<br />

Power steering________________ 185<br />

Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 185<br />

Battery ______________________ 186<br />

Battery charge ________________ 186<br />

Jump starting _________________ 170


460_OM_MY09.book Page 10 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

10<br />

Engine bay,<br />

diesel engine, TTiD 3<br />

Vehicle identification<br />

number________________ 247<br />

Colour code_____________ 247<br />

Engine number __________ 247<br />

Warning labels___________ 11<br />

Gearbox number _________ 247<br />

Engine: description ____________ 175<br />

Engine oil: topping up __________ 180<br />

Engine: technical data __________ 238<br />

Important considerations for<br />

driving______________________ 129<br />

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 182<br />

Driving in hot climates __________ 162<br />

Radiator_____________________ 238<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

ABS brakes_____________ 146<br />

Braking lining ___________ 184<br />

Brake system ___________ 240<br />

Brake fluid______________ 184<br />

Exhaust emission control __ 130<br />

Drive belt _______________ 188<br />

Simple troubleshooting<br />

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 233<br />

Alternator_______________ 188<br />

Changing a fuse _________ 204<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Relays ________________ 208<br />

Fuse table______________ 208<br />

Engine oil: checking level __ 180<br />

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 83<br />

Topping-up fluid _________ 189<br />

Washer jets_____________ 190<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox_______________ 137<br />

Power steering________________ 185<br />

Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 185<br />

Battery ______________________ 186<br />

Battery charge ________________ 186<br />

Jump starting _________________ 170


460_OM_MY09.book Page 11 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

11<br />

Warning labels<br />

Radiator fan<br />

Radiator fan may start at any time.<br />

Fuel-driven heater 3<br />

Switch off the parking heater before<br />

adding fuel.<br />

A/C system<br />

Refrigerant at high pressure.<br />

Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C<br />

system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be<br />

serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult workshop<br />

manual.<br />

The A/C system complies with SAE J639.<br />

Charge: 680 g R134a.<br />

Compressor oil: PAG Oil SP-10.<br />

LEVEL INDICATOR<br />

DARK OK<br />

CLEAR<br />

LOW<br />

P/N 127 93 955<br />

Maintenance Free<br />

12V 60Ah 580A (EN)<br />

000 A-12102-EP<br />

Battery<br />

• No sparks, naked flames or smoking<br />

• Always shield eyes. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury<br />

• Keep the battery out of reach of children<br />

• The battery contains sulphuric acid which could cause blindness or serious burn injuries<br />

• See the Owner’s <strong>Manual</strong> for further information<br />

• Explosive gas may be present in the vicinity of the battery.<br />

Coolant<br />

Never open hot!


460_OM_MY09.book Page 12 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

12<br />

• NEVER fit a child seat in front of the passenger<br />

AIRBAG.<br />

• DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.<br />

Changing wheels<br />

• Only use the jack for the models specified.<br />

• Load the jack with a maximum of 1100 kg.<br />

• Only use the jack on a level and firm surface.<br />

• Do not crawl under a car raised by a jack; use<br />

axle stands.<br />

• There must no one inside the car.<br />

We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop for<br />

Xenon bulb replacement 3.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 13 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

13<br />

Example of symbols that can be found in your car<br />

No sparks,<br />

flames or<br />

smoking<br />

Buckle up<br />

Headlights<br />

Windscreen<br />

wipers<br />

Coolant<br />

temperature<br />

Radiator fan<br />

Refer to the<br />

Owner’s<br />

<strong>Manual</strong><br />

Airbag<br />

Direction<br />

indicators<br />

Windscreen<br />

washers<br />

No charge to<br />

battery<br />

Fuel<br />

Shield eyes<br />

Never place a<br />

rear-facing<br />

child seat in<br />

this seat<br />

Position lights<br />

Defroster<br />

Foot brake<br />

Automatic tyre<br />

pressure monitoring<br />

3<br />

Keep out of<br />

reach of<br />

children<br />

Electric<br />

windows<br />

Hazard<br />

warning lights<br />

Rear window<br />

heating<br />

Coolant level<br />

Battery acid<br />

contains<br />

sulphuric acid<br />

Deactivation<br />

of rear window<br />

switches<br />

Front fog lights<br />

Cabin fan<br />

Engine oil<br />

pressure<br />

Risk of<br />

explosive gas<br />

Central<br />

locking, lock<br />

Rear fog light<br />

ABS brakes<br />

Central<br />

locking,<br />

unlock<br />

TCS/<br />

StabiliTrak ®<br />

Boot lid,<br />

unlock<br />

Preheater plug<br />

(cars with<br />

diesel engine)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 14 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

14<br />

(This page has been left blank.)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 15 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

15<br />

Safety<br />

Seat belts _____________ 16<br />

Seats ________________ 21<br />

Head restraints ________ 26<br />

Child safety ___________ 27<br />

Airbag________________ 34<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 16 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

16 Safety<br />

Seat belts<br />

WARNING<br />

• Buckle up and adjust your seat belt<br />

before driving off so that you can pay<br />

full attention to the traffic.<br />

• Seat belts must be worn at all times<br />

by all car occupants. Child safety, see<br />

page 27.<br />

• Check that the belt tongue engages<br />

securely in the belt lock.<br />

• In the event of a collision, rear seat<br />

passengers not wearing seat belts will<br />

be thrown forward against the front<br />

seat backrests. This will multiply the<br />

stresses imposed on the front seat<br />

passengers and belts and can result in<br />

needless injury or even death to all car<br />

occupants.<br />

Three-point inertia reel seat belts are provided<br />

for all seats.<br />

Research has established that it is equally<br />

as dangerous for rear seat passengers not<br />

to wear their seat belts as for front seat passengers.<br />

Bear in mind that in certain countries it is a<br />

legal requirement for all occupants of the<br />

car to wear a seat belt.<br />

Seat belt reminder<br />

When the ignition is switched on, the seat<br />

belt reminder in the main instrument panel<br />

illuminates and the message Use your<br />

seatbelt. appears in DIC if the driver has not<br />

buckled his/her seat belt.<br />

The seat belt reminder for the passenger<br />

appears in the centre portion of the instrument<br />

panel.<br />

The seat belt reminder for the driver and any<br />

front passenger will re initiate when vehicle<br />

speed exceeds 25 km/h.<br />

If you still do not buckle up, a "ding-dong"<br />

reminder will sound after a further<br />

30 seconds.<br />

Some seat belt reminders may differ from<br />

that which is described above depending on<br />

market requirements, etc.<br />

Driver seat belt reminder


460_OM_MY09.book Page 17 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

17<br />

Correct seating position<br />

Correct position for seat belt<br />

WARNING<br />

• If the wearer slides underneath the<br />

belt in a collision, injury may result<br />

from the hip strap cutting into the<br />

abdomen. Make sure that the hip strap<br />

is properly tensioned.<br />

• Two people must never share one<br />

seat belt. In the event of a collision<br />

those sharing a belt risk being crushed<br />

together and injured.<br />

• Never fasten the seat belt with the<br />

diagonal strap behind the body, pull<br />

the strap off the shoulder or place the<br />

strap under the arm.<br />

• Position the hip strap snugly and low<br />

across the hips so that it just touches the<br />

thighs. The diagonal strap must be as far<br />

in on the shoulder as possible.<br />

• Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted<br />

or rubbing against any sharp edges.<br />

• There should not be any slack in the belt.<br />

Pull the strap tight - particularly important<br />

when thick outdoor clothing is worn.<br />

• Refrain from tilting the backrest too far<br />

back as the seat belt provides best protection<br />

when the seat is in the normal, upright<br />

position.<br />

• Only one person per seat belt!<br />

• For most of the time a seat belt is worn,<br />

the reel will allow the wearer freedom of<br />

movement. The reel locks up automatically<br />

if the strap is jerked or withdrawn<br />

sharply, the car tilts heavily, the brakes are<br />

applied hard or a collision occurs.<br />

• Specially adapted safety equipment<br />

should be used until the child is 140 cm<br />

tall.<br />

• Children who have grown out of child<br />

seats should use the car’s standard threepoint<br />

seat belts.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 18 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

18 Safety<br />

Buckling up Press the red button to release the belt Front belt guide<br />

Front seat belts<br />

Fasten the belt by smoothly pulling out the<br />

strap and inserting the tongue into the<br />

buckle. Check that the tongue is securely<br />

fastened in the belt buckle.<br />

Position the hip strap low across the hips.<br />

Take hold of the diagonal strap close to the<br />

buckle and pull the belt up towards the<br />

shoulder to tighten the hip strap.<br />

Position the diagonal strap as far in on the<br />

shoulder as possible.<br />

Press the red button on the buckle to<br />

release the belt.<br />

The front seat belts have their lower<br />

anchorage points on the seats. The seat<br />

belts follow the seats when the legroom is<br />

adjusted.<br />

Refer to page 227 for how to check the function<br />

of the seat belts, cleaning and suchlike.<br />

Belt guide<br />

The belt guide for the front seat belts can be<br />

adjusted to different heights.<br />

Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as possible.<br />

To avoid chaffing in the case of a short<br />

person, the guide can be lowered until the<br />

belt is a few centimetres from the neck while<br />

still providing safe restraint.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 19 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

19<br />

Raise the belt guide by pushing it upwards<br />

to the desired position. To lower it, depress<br />

the catch release button while lowering the<br />

guide. Check that the guide locks in its new<br />

position.<br />

Expectant mothers<br />

Expectant mothers should position the belt<br />

in such a way that it never exerts pressure<br />

on the stomach. The hip strap should be<br />

placed as low as possible across the hips.<br />

Seat belt pretensioners<br />

WARNING<br />

If the car is involved in a collision, the seat<br />

belts, seat belt pretensioners and other<br />

components must be inspected at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Never make any alterations or repairs to<br />

the seat belts yourself. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

The seat belts of the front seats have pretensioners<br />

and force limiters. These are<br />

deployed in the event of a severe head-on<br />

collision or in a side-on collision. The seat<br />

belt pretensioners are only deployed if the<br />

seat belt is buckled.<br />

The seat belt pretensioners are not activated<br />

should the car roll over.<br />

The seat belt pretensioners serve to reduce<br />

the forward movement of the body by tensioning<br />

the belt. The force limiters reduce<br />

belt loads on the body by "slackening" the<br />

seat belt slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic<br />

energy as gradually as possible.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 20 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

20 Safety<br />

Seat belts, rear seat<br />

WARNING<br />

• Take care that the belt does not<br />

become trapped when the backrest is<br />

folded down or raised, see page 110.<br />

• If you must place an item of luggage<br />

on a seat, ensure that it is secured<br />

properly with the seat belt. This<br />

reduces the risk of its being sent flying<br />

and causing injury in the event of a collision.<br />

• Protect the belt from sharp edges.<br />

• Make sure you use the correct seat<br />

belt buckle. The buckles for the centre<br />

and left-hand rear seats are close<br />

together.<br />

The three rear seats all have three-point<br />

seat belts with inertia reels.<br />

Fasten the belt by smoothly pulling out the<br />

strap and inserting the tongue into the<br />

buckle. Check that the tongue is securely<br />

fastened.<br />

Take hold of the diagonal strap close to the<br />

buckle and pull the belt up towards the<br />

shoulder to tighten the hip strap. Position<br />

the hip strap low across the hips.<br />

Seat belts, rear seat. The centre head restraint is optional<br />

Position the diagonal strap as far in on the<br />

shoulder as possible.<br />

Press the red button on the buckle to<br />

release the belt.<br />

Refer to page 227 for how to check the function<br />

of the seat belts, cleaning and suchlike.<br />

Securing an item on the rear seat


460_OM_MY09.book Page 21 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Seats<br />

WARNING<br />

Only adjust the driver’s seat when the car<br />

is stationary.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>ly adjusted front seats<br />

The following seat adjustments can be<br />

made to achieve a comfortable seating<br />

position:<br />

• Height 3<br />

• Legroom<br />

• Backrest rake angle<br />

• Lumbar support firmness 3<br />

• Head restraint height<br />

We recommend that you adjust the driver’s<br />

seat in the following order:<br />

1 Height<br />

2 Legroom<br />

3 Backrest rake angle<br />

4 Head restraint height<br />

Lastly, adjust the position of the steering<br />

wheel, see page 96.<br />

Electrically adjustable front seats 3<br />

See page 23.<br />

Electric heating, front seats 3<br />

See pages 93.<br />

Height adjustment<br />

Height setting 3<br />

Safety<br />

21<br />

Adjust the height of the seat with the lever<br />

on the side of the seat.<br />

Raise the lever repeatedly to raise the seat.<br />

Press down the lever repeatedly to lower<br />

the seat.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 22 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

22 Safety<br />

Legroom adjustment<br />

Adjusting the backrest<br />

Lumbar support adjustment<br />

Legroom adjustment<br />

WARNING<br />

Check that the seat is locked in its new<br />

position. If not, the seat may move while<br />

the car is being driven and cause injury to<br />

car occupants in the event of a collision.<br />

Adjust the legroom with the lever on the<br />

front edge of the seat.<br />

Backrest rake angle<br />

WARNING<br />

The backrest should be upright for<br />

driving, so that the seat belt, airbag and<br />

backrest can provide optimum protection<br />

in the event of emergency braking or a<br />

collision, particularly from the rear.<br />

Adjust the rake angle of the backrest by<br />

turning the wheel.<br />

Lumbar support 3<br />

Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by<br />

turning the wheel.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 23 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

23<br />

Electrically adjustable front<br />

seats 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• The seats are actuated by powerful<br />

motors. Make sure that nothing can be<br />

trapped or damaged when adjusting<br />

the seat.<br />

• Bear in mind that children can be<br />

injured if they play with the electrically<br />

adjustable seats.<br />

• Always remove the ignition key<br />

(remote control) when you leave the<br />

car to prevent personal injury caused<br />

by the operation of the electrically<br />

adjustable seats, for example, due to<br />

children playing. Refer to page 24 for<br />

information on the electrically operated<br />

seat with memory.<br />

For safety reasons, the seats can only be<br />

adjusted when the ignition is in position 3.<br />

To facilitate getting into the car, both seats<br />

can be adjusted when either of the front<br />

doors is open. The seats can also be<br />

adjusted up to 2 minutes after both doors<br />

have been closed (applicable only to<br />

cars without window and sunroof pinch<br />

protection).<br />

Height and angle adjustment<br />

Height adjustment and seat<br />

angle<br />

Adjust the height of the seat with the rear<br />

section of the front lever.<br />

Adjust the angle of the seat with the front<br />

section of the front lever.<br />

Legroom adjustment<br />

Legroom adjustment<br />

Adjust the legroom with the front lever.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 24 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

24 Safety<br />

Adjusting the backrest Lumbar support adjustment Memory function buttons<br />

Backrest rake angle<br />

WARNING<br />

The backrest should be upright for<br />

driving, so that the seat belt, airbag and<br />

backrest can provide optimum protection<br />

in the event of emergency braking or a<br />

collision, particularly from the rear.<br />

Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with<br />

the rear lever.<br />

Lumbar support 3<br />

Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by<br />

turning the wheel.<br />

Memory function 3<br />

WARNING<br />

The legroom of the electrically operated<br />

driver’s seat can always be adjusted,<br />

whether or not a front door is open and<br />

irrespective of the position of the ignition<br />

switch.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 25 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

25<br />

When the ignition is ON, all seat settings<br />

can be adjusted. When the door is open and<br />

before the remote control has been inserted<br />

into the ignition switch, all seat settings can<br />

be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.<br />

The memory also includes the door mirror<br />

settings.<br />

Storing and restoring settings<br />

1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.<br />

The lumbar support is not included by<br />

the memory function.<br />

2 Press and hold the M-button and then<br />

press one of the preset buttons (1, 2<br />

or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that<br />

the settings have been saved.<br />

To recall programmed settings, press and<br />

hold the required preset button while the<br />

seat and door mirrors adopt their programmed<br />

positions. The memory function<br />

also includes the door mirror settings.<br />

To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side<br />

door mirror can be angled down, refer to<br />

page 100.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 26 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

26 Safety<br />

Head restraints<br />

WARNING<br />

• Adjust the head restraint height so that<br />

your head is optimally supported, thus<br />

reducing the likelihood of whiplash<br />

injury in the event of an accident.<br />

• Raise the head restraint of the seats<br />

that are occupied.<br />

The front seats are equipped with active<br />

head restraints, which reduce the risk of<br />

whiplash injury in the event of a rear-end<br />

collision.<br />

The active head restraints are mechanical<br />

and are activated by boy weight. The mechanism<br />

is integrated in the backrest and is<br />

connected to the head restraint.<br />

In the event of a rear-end collision, the body<br />

is forced back against the backrest. This,<br />

in turn, causes the mechanism to press<br />

the head restraint forwards and upwards,<br />

thus limiting the backward movement of<br />

the head.<br />

Lowering the front head restraints<br />

The active head restraints do not normally<br />

require replacement after a rear-end collision.<br />

The front and rear head restraints can be<br />

raised and lowered to a number of positions.<br />

• To raise:<br />

take hold of the head restraint on both<br />

sides and pull it straight up.<br />

Lowering the rear head restraints<br />

• To lower:<br />

front head restraint: press in and hold the<br />

left catch depressed while lowering the<br />

head restraint.<br />

rear head restraint: press the head<br />

restraint forwards and downwards.<br />

To improve rearward visibility, the rear head<br />

restraints can be lowered when the seats<br />

are unoccupied.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 27 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Child safety<br />

WARNING<br />

• Children must always be suitably<br />

restrained in the car.<br />

• NEVER fit a child seat in<br />

front of the passenger<br />

AIRBAG.<br />

• DEATH or SERIOUS<br />

INJURY can occur.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never leave children unattended in<br />

the car, not even for a short period of<br />

time.<br />

– Children and animals can suffer heat<br />

stroke, and even die, in a very short<br />

space of time.<br />

– Children can cause the car to move<br />

and injure themselves and others.<br />

• Remove the remote control from the<br />

car when refuelling.<br />

• Do not let children climb onto or under<br />

the car.<br />

• Make sure no children are standing<br />

behind the car when reversing into or<br />

out of a garage or driveway.<br />

• Never let the car idle in a garage due<br />

to the risk of carbon monoxide poisoning.<br />

• Keep an eye on children while<br />

washing the car. Small children can<br />

drown in a matter of minutes in only<br />

small quantities of water.<br />

Safety<br />

WARNING<br />

27<br />

Make sure children do not get locked<br />

in the luggage compartment<br />

• Teach children not to play in or around<br />

cars.<br />

• Keep an eye on children when loading<br />

or unloading the luggage compartment<br />

to prevent inadvertently locking<br />

children in the car.<br />

• Always lock the car and keep the<br />

remote control out of reach of children.<br />

• Keep the rear seat backrests raised to<br />

prevent children from crawling into the<br />

luggage compartment from the cabin.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 28 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

28 Safety<br />

General information on child<br />

safety<br />

The safety of children in the car is just as<br />

important as that of adults.<br />

Children must use specially adapted safety<br />

equipment. The equipment must be<br />

adapted to the size of the child.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> dealer before fitting a carrycot,<br />

child seat or booster cushion.<br />

Make sure you are acquainted with the<br />

legal requirements for seating children<br />

in the car.<br />

Specially adapted safety equipment should<br />

be used until the child is 140 cm tall.<br />

Child seats 3<br />

Child seats are available in different revisions<br />

to suit the child’s weight. See the table<br />

on page 30.<br />

The car seats available from authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> dealers are fitted using the car’s<br />

standard 3-point seat belt.<br />

Always follow the fitting instructions<br />

supplied with the child seat.<br />

Use a child seat approved for the weight<br />

of the child and suitable for its height,<br />

see page 30.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 29 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

29<br />

Rear seat - fitting a child seat<br />

The underside anchorage straps of a rearfacing<br />

3 child seat must be attached to the<br />

attachment points that are found under the<br />

driver and passenger seats (see illustration).<br />

For how to fit an ISOFIX seat, see page 32.<br />

Attach each underside anchorage straps to<br />

the nearest attachment eye.<br />

Anchorage eyes for underside child seat<br />

anchorage straps.<br />

Example of child seat positions in the<br />

rear seat.<br />

The child seat illustrated is just an<br />

example. Some child seats have a<br />

different appearance.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 30 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

30 Safety<br />

Weight<br />

(age)<br />

Height<br />

Up to 10 kg<br />

(up to approx.<br />

9months)<br />

Up to 13 kg<br />

(up to approx.<br />

2years)<br />

9 to 18 kg<br />

(approx. 9 months<br />

to 4 years)<br />

15–36 kg<br />

(approx.<br />

3–12 years)<br />

shorter than 140 cm<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> recommends<br />

that child seats 3 be placed in the rear seat of the car.<br />

The various seats are approved as follows:<br />

Front<br />

passenger seat<br />

X: children shorter than 140 cm are not allowed to sit here.<br />

U: Universally approved seat.<br />

L: see next page for recommended child seats.<br />

How long a child seat may be used is not just<br />

determined by the weight of the child but<br />

also by its height.<br />

Outer rear<br />

seat<br />

Centre rear<br />

seat<br />

X U L<br />

X U L<br />

X U L<br />

X U L


460_OM_MY09.book Page 31 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

31<br />

Weight<br />

(age)<br />

Height<br />

Up to 10 kg<br />

(up to approx.<br />

9months)<br />

Up to 13 kg<br />

(up to approx. 2 years)<br />

9 to 18 kg<br />

(approx. 9 months<br />

to 4 years)<br />

15 to 25 kg<br />

(approx.<br />

3 to 6 years)<br />

15–36 kg<br />

(approx.<br />

3–12 years)<br />

shorter than 140 cm<br />

15–36 kg<br />

(3–12 years)<br />

shorter than 140 cm<br />

Child seats 3, approved as per ECE R44.03<br />

Child Seat<br />

with infant insert<br />

Child Seat<br />

with infant insert<br />

Child Seat<br />

Child Seat<br />

Belt Seat<br />

Booster Cushion


460_OM_MY09.book Page 32 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

32 Safety<br />

ISOFIX<br />

To facilitate fitting a child seat, your car has<br />

ISOFIX attachment points. ISOFIX is a car<br />

industry standard for the fitting of child<br />

seats. There are ISOFIX attachment points<br />

in the outer rear seats.<br />

The attachments consist of two anchorages<br />

for each child seat. They are only to be<br />

used together with special child seats. The<br />

attachment points are located between the<br />

seat cushion and backrest. There is a mark<br />

above each attachment point to make it<br />

easier to find.<br />

Fitting an ISOFIX child seat<br />

1 Place the child seat on the seat cushion.<br />

2 Slide the attachments on the child seat<br />

in between the seat cushion and backrest.<br />

3 Press the attachments on the child seat<br />

down onto the seat.<br />

4 Press the child seat in towards the<br />

attachment points to lock it in position.<br />

5 Pull the child seat to check that it is<br />

securely positioned and that both<br />

attachment points on the child seat are<br />

securely engaged with the ISOFIX<br />

brackets.<br />

The illustration shows ISOFIX attachment points. The centre head restraint is an option.<br />

Only use the belt supplied with the ISOFIX<br />

seat.<br />

Always follow the installation instructions<br />

supplied with the ISOFIX seat.<br />

The availability of child seats designed for<br />

the ISOFIX system can be limited.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 33 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

33<br />

Top tether<br />

(Australia only)<br />

WARNING<br />

Child restraint anchorages are designed<br />

to withstand only those loads imposed by<br />

correctly fitted child restraints.<br />

Under no circumstances are they to be<br />

used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for<br />

attaching other items or equipment to the<br />

vehicle.<br />

If a cargo net is fitted, do not pull the top<br />

tether strap through the cargo net in such<br />

a way that there is slack in the strap to the<br />

child seat.<br />

Child restraints with a tether must be<br />

anchored according to Australian law.<br />

If you have any questions regarding child<br />

anchorages we recommend that you consult<br />

your <strong>Cadillac</strong> dealer.<br />

The car is provided with three top tether<br />

anchorages. Use the one that is right behind<br />

the child restraint and attach the restraint as<br />

follows:<br />

1 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.<br />

2 Secure the lower part of the child<br />

restraint by means of the lower anchorages<br />

(ISOFIX) or the seat belts as<br />

described in the child restraint installation<br />

instruction.<br />

Child restraint anchorages<br />

3 Lower the headrest and route the tether<br />

over it.<br />

4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.<br />

If the anchorage is not visible then<br />

release (see page 110) and fold the rear<br />

seat backrest forward enough to reach<br />

and fold up the anchorage in question.<br />

5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the<br />

child restraint is pressed hard against<br />

the backrest.<br />

6 Pull the child restraint to make a second<br />

check that the restraint is securely<br />

attached at both the lower anchorages<br />

bars or the safety belts and the top tether<br />

strap.<br />

Lower anchor (ISOFIX) and top tether<br />

anchor locations


460_OM_MY09.book Page 34 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

34 Safety<br />

Airbag<br />

WARNING<br />

To reduce risk of injury:<br />

• Always wear your seat belt.<br />

• Always adjust your seat so that you<br />

are as far back as possible but still<br />

able to operate the pedals and reach<br />

the steering wheel and controls comfortably.<br />

• Children shorter than 140 cm must<br />

always travel in the rear seat as the<br />

car has a passenger airbag.<br />

• Never place a child seat in the front<br />

passenger seat.<br />

Airbag system components<br />

• Airbag in steering wheel.<br />

• Airbag in front of front passenger seat.<br />

• Side airbag in side of front seat backrests.<br />

• Inflatable curtain along long sides of<br />

headlining (between front and rear roof<br />

pillars).<br />

• Seat belt pretensioner for the two front<br />

seats.<br />

The airbag system supplements the protection<br />

provided by the seat belts to further<br />

enhance the safety of occupants taller than<br />

140 cm.<br />

When the system is activated at the moment<br />

of a frontal impact, the airbag inflates and<br />

then deflates through holes in the back. The<br />

whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,<br />

quicker than the blink of an eye.<br />

The driver and passenger airbags are socalled<br />

smart airbags. This means that the<br />

system compensates for factors such as the<br />

force of the collision.<br />

When the airbag system is activated all of<br />

the doors are unlocked while the interior/<br />

exterior lighting and the hazard warning<br />

lights are illuminated at the same time.<br />

Note:<br />

The sensor reacts differently depending<br />

on whether or not the front seat belts on the<br />

driver’s and passenger sides are used.<br />

Situations can therefore arise where only<br />

one of the airbags inflates. It is also possible<br />

for only the seat belt pretensioners to be<br />

activated and for the airbags to remain uninflated.<br />

If only Stage I is activated at the moment<br />

of impact, Stage II will automatically be activated<br />

later to neutralise the gas generator in<br />

the airbag.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 35 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

35<br />

If the impact sensors register forces corresponding<br />

to a high speed collision (airbag<br />

stage II activated), the inflatable curtains will<br />

also be triggered. See page 40.<br />

If a fault arises in the airbag system during<br />

a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the<br />

main instrument panel will come on and the<br />

DIC will display:<br />

Airbag malfunction.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Inflated airbag (driver’s side).<br />

Inflation and deflation of airbag takes<br />

approx. 0.1 s.<br />

Both front airbags inflated<br />

The driver airbag and passenger airbag are<br />

triggered by violent front-end collisions.<br />

They will not be activated by minor front-end<br />

impacts, if the car overturns or by rear-end<br />

and side-on impacts.<br />

Two impact sensors are located on the top<br />

of the front bumper under the painted shell.<br />

These sensors register any vehicle impact<br />

at an extremely early stage. Based on this<br />

information and the central sensor in the<br />

control module, the control module determines<br />

whether airbag deployment is<br />

required. The control module also determines<br />

whether other airbag system components<br />

should be deployed: seat belt pretensioners,<br />

inflatable curtains.<br />

Which airbag system components are<br />

deployed depends on a number of factors,<br />

such as the force of the collision and the<br />

angle of impact.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 36 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

36 Safety<br />

Airbag system<br />

1 Steering wheel with integral airbag<br />

2 Passenger airbag<br />

3 Side airbags<br />

4 Inflatable curtain<br />

5 Front sensor, in front bumper<br />

6 Side impact sensor<br />

7 Side impact sensor<br />

8 Electronic control module with central sensor<br />

Accessories and other equipment must<br />

not be fitted to the surfaces marked as<br />

these are where the airbags inflate in the<br />

event of a collision


460_OM_MY09.book Page 37 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

37<br />

WARNING<br />

• All car occupants must always wear a<br />

seat belt, even if the car is equipped<br />

with airbags.<br />

• Note that because the airbag inflates<br />

and deflates extremely quickly, it will<br />

not provide protection against a<br />

second impact occurring in the same<br />

incident. Always wear your seat belt.<br />

• The gas that fills the airbag on inflation<br />

is hot. In some circumstances, this gas<br />

can cause minor burns to the arms<br />

when the airbag deflates.<br />

• Fumes are generated by the chemical<br />

reaction that inflates the airbag.<br />

Skin surfaces that show signs of irritation<br />

should be washed with clean<br />

water and a mild soap as soon as possible.<br />

In the event of eye irritation, flush the<br />

eyes thoroughly with clean water for at<br />

least 20 minutes.<br />

In case of persistent irritation, consult<br />

a doctor.<br />

• Never attach anything to the steering<br />

wheel, fascia or roof pillars as this<br />

could cause personal injury when an<br />

airbag inflates. The same applies to<br />

anything you might have in your<br />

mouth, such as a pipe.<br />

• Never rest your hands or forearms on<br />

the steering wheel where the airbag is<br />

fitted.<br />

• If the airbag lamp in the main<br />

instrument panel does not go out after<br />

start or illuminates or flashing while<br />

driving, the car must be checked<br />

immediately by a workshop. We recommend<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

If the airbag lamp is illuminated,<br />

the system may fail to deploy in the<br />

event of a collision or could deploy<br />

unintentionally.<br />

• Always keep the whole of your back in<br />

contact with the backrest, and your<br />

seat positioned as far back as is practical.<br />

Otherwise you will be thrown<br />

back against the backrest when the<br />

airbag inflates which could cause you<br />

injury or death. The airbag needs<br />

room in which to inflate.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 38 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

38 Safety<br />

Operation of the steering wheel airbag in<br />

a front-end collision<br />

Moment of impact.<br />

Sensors detect a<br />

retardation and send a<br />

signal via the control<br />

module to a gas generator<br />

that inflates the<br />

airbag.<br />

The inflating airbag<br />

cushions the driver.<br />

Airbag now fully<br />

inflated.<br />

The airbag begins to<br />

deflate.<br />

Front passenger seat<br />

The system is the same as that used on the<br />

driver’s side.<br />

The airbag systems are interconnected and<br />

have a common warning lamp. The passenger<br />

airbag is housed in the fascia above<br />

the glove compartment and is marked<br />

"AIRBAG".<br />

In the event of a frontal collision both airbags<br />

are activated even if the passenger<br />

seat is unoccupied.<br />

WARNING<br />

• NEVER fit a child seat in<br />

front of the passenger<br />

AIRBAG.<br />

• DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can<br />

occur.<br />

• Children shorter than 140 cm must<br />

never sit in front of an airbag.<br />

• Never let a child stand in front of the<br />

front passenger seat or sit on the passenger’s<br />

knee due to the risk of<br />

serious injury or death to the child by<br />

the airbag in the event of a collision.<br />

• Always keep the door of the glove<br />

compartment shut while the car is<br />

moving. An open glove compartment<br />

could cause personal injury in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Keep your feet on the floor - never put<br />

feet up on the fascia, on the seat or out<br />

of the window.<br />

• Do not carry anything in your lap.<br />

• Never place anything on the fascia or<br />

in front of the seat as, in addition to<br />

being a hazard to passengers, this<br />

could interfere with the function of the<br />

airbag in the event of a collision. Never<br />

mount accessories on the fascia.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 39 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

39<br />

Head protection<br />

Pillar trim and the headlining are designed<br />

to absorb energy from a head impact. After<br />

a collision, parts located where a passenger<br />

was sitting must be replaced. Retrofitting of<br />

other parts on pillar trim and the headlining<br />

is prohibited as this could hinder deployment<br />

of the inflatable curtain.<br />

Side-impact protection<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never fit seat covers. Seat covers can<br />

prevent the side airbags from inflating<br />

correctly and providing the intended<br />

extra protection.<br />

• Do not place any objects in the area<br />

that would be filled by an inflated side<br />

airbag.<br />

• For optimum protection, sit upright<br />

with the seat belt correctly fastened.<br />

• The side impact protection is only<br />

deployed in the event of a side-on collision,<br />

not by a rear-end collision or if<br />

the car rolls over.<br />

• Damage or wear to the upholstery or<br />

seams of the seat in the area near the<br />

side airbag must be immediately rectified.<br />

We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The front seat side airbags protect the upper<br />

body and are integrated in the outside of the<br />

front seat backrests. The inflatable curtain is<br />

a component of the side impact protection<br />

system. See page 40.<br />

The side airbags are designed to inflate only<br />

under certain conditions caused by a sideon<br />

collision. Inflation depends on such factors<br />

as the force and angle of the impact, the<br />

speed of the car on impact, and the point on<br />

the side of the car at which the impact<br />

occurs.<br />

There are two sensors on each side of the<br />

car: one at the rear of each front door sill and<br />

one in the lower part of each C-pillar. The<br />

side-impact protection is only activated on<br />

the side of impact, while the seat belt pretensioners<br />

on both sides are deployed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 40 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

40 Safety<br />

• Do not position a sun visor or similar in<br />

the area that would be filled by the<br />

inflatable curtain.<br />

• Do not attach anything to the car’s<br />

headlining, roof pillars or side panels<br />

as this could prevent the side-impact<br />

protection from providing the intended<br />

protection.<br />

Deployed side airbag and inflatable<br />

curtain<br />

Inflatable curtain 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Do not sit with your head rested<br />

against the side window. The inflatable<br />

curtain is designed to inflate<br />

between the window and the head.<br />

Resting the head against the window<br />

could prevent the inflatable curtain<br />

from providing the intended protection.<br />

• Hang only light clothes from the hooks<br />

on the rear seat courtesy handles. The<br />

items of clothing must not contain<br />

heavy or sharp objects. Do not use<br />

coat hangers.<br />

• Do not stack loads so high that they<br />

could encumber the inflatable curtain<br />

in the event of a collision.<br />

The inflatable curtains, which protect the<br />

head, are concealed along the lengths of<br />

the headlining (all the way between front<br />

and rear roof pillars).<br />

The inflatable curtains inflate at the same<br />

time as the side airbags in the front seats in<br />

case of a side-on impact.<br />

The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of<br />

head injuries to the occupants of the car’s<br />

outer seats. The inflatable curtains cover<br />

the area between the front and rear roof pillars.<br />

If the airbag system registers forces equivalent<br />

to a high-speed frontal collision<br />

(Stage II for the steering wheel and passenger<br />

airbags), the inflatable curtains will<br />

also be detonated.<br />

Deployed inflatable curtain


460_OM_MY09.book Page 41 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

41<br />

Prohibited seating position<br />

For optimal protection, do not sit too close to<br />

the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if<br />

someone is sleeping in the car. The inflatable<br />

curtain comes down from the headlining<br />

and covers a large portion of the side<br />

windows down to the door trim.<br />

Airbag warning lamp<br />

WARNING<br />

If the airbag warning lamp in the main<br />

instrument panel does not extinguish<br />

after the car has been started, or comes<br />

on while driving, this indicates that the<br />

function of the airbag system cannot be<br />

guaranteed. The car must be checked<br />

immediately. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

See page 65.<br />

Servicing the airbag system<br />

The system should be checked as prescribed<br />

by the service programme. In other<br />

respects, the system is maintenance-free.<br />

Work on and scrapping of<br />

airbags and seat belt<br />

pretensioners<br />

WARNING<br />

• Under no circumstances may any<br />

modifications be made that affect the<br />

steering wheel or the airbag’s electrical<br />

circuitry.<br />

• During any welding, both battery<br />

cables must be disconnected and covered<br />

over.<br />

• Before quick drying paint in the vicinity<br />

of the electronic control module, the<br />

module’s grounding points and wiring<br />

must be covered.<br />

• Airbags and seat belt pretensioners<br />

must be detonated under controlled<br />

conditions before the car is scrapped<br />

or any of the system’s components are<br />

removed. Airbags or seat belt pretensioners<br />

that have been detonated in a<br />

collision must be replaced by new<br />

ones.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 42 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

42 Safety<br />

• The car’s impact protection consists of<br />

various safety items, such as airbags,<br />

seat belts, steering wheel, seats and<br />

instrument panel. These items are<br />

harmonised to provide excellent protection<br />

in the event of a collision.<br />

Therefore, never transfer an airbag<br />

from one car to another.<br />

There is no guarantee that a transferred<br />

airbag will function optimally in<br />

the event of a collision.<br />

• Work on the car that requires the<br />

replacing or scrapping of an airbag or<br />

seat belt pretensioner must be carried<br />

out at a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Frequently asked questions<br />

about airbags<br />

Do you still need to wear a seat belt if the car<br />

has airbags?<br />

Yes, always! Airbags merely supplement<br />

the car’s normal safety system. Moreover,<br />

an airbag will only be actuated in a serious<br />

front-end or side-on collision, which means,<br />

of course, that it provides no protection in<br />

minor frontal or side-on collisions, in rearend<br />

collisions or if the car rolls over.<br />

Seat belts can prevent passengers from<br />

being thrown around or out of the car and<br />

being seriously or fatally injured.<br />

But they also ensure, in a collision in which<br />

the airbags are detonated, that the airbag<br />

will make optimum contact with the occupant,<br />

i.e. square on from the front. If the<br />

occupant meets the airbag at an offset, the<br />

protection afforded will be diminished.<br />

In addition, airbags provide no protection<br />

against a secondary impact occurring in the<br />

same incident. Therefore, wear a seat belt<br />

at all times.<br />

Don’t sit too close to the airbag; it needs<br />

room to inflate.<br />

The airbag inflates very quickly and powerfully<br />

in order to protect an adult person,<br />

before their head is thrown forward, in a<br />

violent front-end collision.<br />

When are the driver and passenger airbags<br />

detonated?<br />

The airbags will only be detonated under<br />

certain predetermined conditions in a violent<br />

front-end collision, depending on such<br />

factors as the force and angle of the impact,<br />

the speed of the car on impact, and the<br />

resistance to deformation of the impacting<br />

object.<br />

The airbag system can only be activated<br />

once in the same incident.<br />

Do not attempt to drive the car after an<br />

airbag has been detonated, even if this is<br />

possible.<br />

What won’t trigger the airbag?<br />

The airbag system will not be activated in all<br />

front-end collisions. For instance, if the car<br />

has hit something relatively soft and yielding<br />

(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid<br />

object at a low speed, the airbag system will<br />

not necessarily be triggered.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 43 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

43<br />

How loud is the detonation?<br />

There is a short-lived, loud noise on detonation<br />

but it will not damage your hearing. For<br />

a short time afterwards you could experience<br />

a buzzing or ringing noise in your ears.<br />

Most people who have experienced this do<br />

not remember the noise of the detonation -<br />

only the noise of the collision itself.<br />

Can I have a child seat in the front seat if the<br />

car has a passenger airbag?<br />

Definitely not! The force and speed with<br />

which the airbag inflates would propel the<br />

child seat violently backwards, which could<br />

cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.<br />

What should I do if the airbag warning light<br />

comes on?<br />

The airbag system’s diagnostics function<br />

has detected a fault. Proper function of the<br />

system cannot be guaranteed and the<br />

system could be activated erroneously. Visit<br />

a workshop immediately. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

Are the dust and fumes given off when the<br />

airbag operates at all harmful?<br />

Most people who have remained in a car<br />

with little or no ventilation for several minutes<br />

normally only suffer mild throat or eye<br />

irritation. Try, if possible, not to get dust on<br />

your skin as it can cause irritation.<br />

In case of persistent irritation, consult a<br />

doctor.<br />

If you suffer from asthma, the incident may<br />

bring on an attack, in which case you should<br />

follow the normal procedure advised by<br />

your doctor. It is advisable to consult a<br />

doctor afterwards.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 44 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

44 Safety<br />

(This page has been left blank.)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 45 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

45<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

Doors ________________ 46<br />

Locks ________________ 46<br />

Car alarm 3 ___________ 54<br />

Opening the fuel filler<br />

flap manually 3_______ 60<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 46 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

46 Locks and car alarm<br />

Doors<br />

Open the door by lifting the door handle.<br />

The following message appears on the DIC<br />

if a door is not closed (text displayed first<br />

when vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h and<br />

the door has still not been closed):<br />

Close doors.<br />

Locks<br />

WARNING<br />

Having the doors locked while on the road<br />

will reduce the likelihood of:<br />

• children, in particular, opening doors<br />

and falling out of the car<br />

• intruders entering the car when it is<br />

moving slowly or at a standstill.<br />

However, it must also be remembered<br />

that locked doors can hamper rescuers<br />

in the event of a collision.<br />

Remote control<br />

The remote control and ignition key are<br />

integrated in one unit, and referred to in this<br />

manual as the remote control.<br />

The remote control contains a mechanical<br />

key, referred to in this manual as the traditional<br />

key. This traditional key can be used<br />

in an emergency to lock or unlock the<br />

driver’s door from outside, see page 49.<br />

This key does not fit the ignition switch.<br />

A key code number is supplied with your<br />

car. This number needs to be quoted for<br />

ordering a new traditional key (contained<br />

in the remote control). Therefore, keep this<br />

number in a safe place.<br />

The remote control contains an electronic<br />

code that is unique to your car. When the<br />

remote control is inserted into the ignition<br />

switch, this code is checked. If the code is<br />

incorrect, the car will not start.<br />

The car is supplied with two remote controls.<br />

It is possible to have up to five remote<br />

controls programmed for the car at any one<br />

time. If one is lost, a replacement should be<br />

obtained as soon as possible. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop. When a new remote<br />

control is programmed into the car, the lost<br />

one will be deprogrammed automatically.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 47 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

47<br />

Note:<br />

If a new remote control has to be ordered<br />

and programmed, at least one old one is<br />

required for the locking system’s electronic<br />

unit to recognise the new (ordered) remote<br />

control. Once the new remote control has<br />

been programmed, the old unit that is lost<br />

will not work. Therefore, you should carry<br />

two remote controls separately, especially<br />

on long journeys.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The remote control contains delicate<br />

electronics.<br />

• Do not expose it to water.<br />

• Avoid rough handling.<br />

• Do not place the remote control where<br />

it may be subjected to high temperatures,<br />

such as on the fascia.<br />

• Warm the remote control in your<br />

hands for a couple of minutes if it has<br />

become very cold to prevent malfunction.<br />

• For details on changing the battery,<br />

refer to page 52.<br />

Remote control<br />

1 Lock.<br />

2 Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting.<br />

3 Opens boot lid.<br />

Checks number of remote controls, see<br />

page 52.<br />

4 Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.<br />

Activates panic function (cars with car alarm).<br />

Remote control functions<br />

Button Pressed once Press and hold<br />

button 2 s<br />

Locks all doors, fuel filler<br />

flap and boot lid. Doors<br />

cannot be opened from<br />

inside.<br />

Unlocks all doors, fuel filler<br />

flap and boot lid.<br />

Opens boot lid.<br />

Checks number of remote<br />

controls, see page 52.<br />

Turns on exterior and cabin<br />

lighting *) for 30 s or turns<br />

off exterior and cabin<br />

lighting.<br />

Deactivates panic alarm.<br />

Comfort closing,<br />

see page 98.<br />

Comfort opening,<br />

see page 97.<br />

*) position lights, side direction indicators, tail<br />

lights and number plate lighting<br />

The panic function is only available on cars<br />

fitted with a car alarm (option for cars<br />

without car alarm, we recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop),<br />

see page 57.<br />

_<br />

Cars with car<br />

alarm: Panic<br />

alarm (activates<br />

alarm manually).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 48 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

48 Locks and car alarm<br />

Locking/unlocking the car<br />

Remote locking and unlocking also control<br />

the car alarm (if fitted).<br />

Locked doors cannot be opened from inside<br />

the car.<br />

Remote locking<br />

WARNING<br />

None of the car doors can be opened from<br />

the inside when the car is locked. The car<br />

is TSL locked 3 (Theft Security Lock).<br />

Never lock anyone in the car.<br />

Press the button once – locks all<br />

doors and the boot lid and activates TSL.<br />

The hazard warning lights will flash once<br />

to confirm.<br />

In order for TSL to be activated, all doors<br />

and the boot lid must be closed when the<br />

car is locked. Otherwise, the car is locked<br />

without the TSL function.<br />

TSL locking 3<br />

(Theft Security Lock)<br />

TSL locking means that the doors can<br />

only be unlocked with the remote control.<br />

The front left door can be unlocked with<br />

the traditional key. See page 49.<br />

If you are seated in the car and TSL is<br />

active, TSL will be deactivated if you insert<br />

the remote control into the ignition switch.<br />

The car will remain locked.<br />

If you wish to lock the car without activating<br />

TSL, hold a passenger door open and lock<br />

the car with the remote control. Then close<br />

the door.<br />

Remote unlocking<br />

Pressing the button once – unlocks all<br />

doors, the fuel filler flap and the boot lid.<br />

The hazard warning lights will flash twice<br />

to confirm.<br />

If remote unlocking should fail to work,<br />

see page 49.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 49 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

49<br />

Intermittent malfunctioning<br />

Equipment in the vicinity of the car that uses<br />

the same frequency as the remote control<br />

may cause interference to the remote control<br />

signal. In this case, retry from another<br />

angle and aim at the receiver located by<br />

the steering wheel.<br />

If remote unlocking should fail to work<br />

1 Remove the traditional key from the<br />

remote control by pressing the emblem<br />

on the reverse of the remote control.<br />

(This key only fits the front left-hand<br />

door.)<br />

2 Unlock the door with the key.<br />

Note:<br />

If the car is equipped with a car alarm, this<br />

will be triggered. Silence the alarm by<br />

inserting the remote control in the ignition<br />

switch and turning it to the position 3.<br />

Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door<br />

with the traditional key<br />

1 Lock<br />

2 Unlock


460_OM_MY09.book Page 50 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

50 Locks and car alarm<br />

Locking a car with flat battery<br />

The steering wheel lock requires sufficient<br />

battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the<br />

battery voltage drops below a certain level<br />

while the remote control is in the ignition<br />

switch, you will not be able to remove the<br />

remote control.<br />

If you must leave the car, proceed as<br />

follows:<br />

Lock the car by pressing down the lock<br />

buttons on the doors. Lock the front left<br />

door from outside with the traditional key,<br />

see page 49. The car is now locked. If the<br />

car has a car alarm, this will remain inactive.<br />

Boot lid<br />

The boot lid is unlocked along with the<br />

car doors.<br />

Open the boot lid with the handle above<br />

the number plate.<br />

Sedan: The boot lid can also be unlocked<br />

and opened via button on the remote<br />

control.<br />

Wagon: The boot lid can also be unlocked<br />

and opened via button on the remote<br />

control.<br />

Cars with car alarm<br />

The movement sensor and tilt sensor in<br />

the cabin are now disabled.<br />

Note:<br />

The boot lid is unlocked when it is closed.<br />

Lock it by pressing button on the<br />

remote control. If the car has an alarm, it will<br />

now be armed.<br />

Central locking switch<br />

Switch on driver’s door<br />

The central locking can also be operated<br />

from inside the car using the switch by the<br />

driver’s door handle.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 51 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

51<br />

• Locking the car with the remote control<br />

renders this switch inoperative.<br />

• If you are inside the car and lock the car<br />

with the remote control, TSL will be activated.<br />

This means that the switch on the<br />

driver’s door will be rendered inoperative<br />

and the car must be unlocked with the<br />

remote control. TSL will be deactivated if<br />

you insert the remote control into the ignition<br />

switch, returning the power supply to<br />

the driver’s door switch. The doors cannot<br />

however be opened from outside the car.<br />

If the car is left with one or more doors open,<br />

the interior lighting will be switched off automatically<br />

after 20 minutes. This is to prevent<br />

the battery from running flat. Also, if the car<br />

has electrically adjustable seats, these will<br />

cease to operate.<br />

Child safety locks<br />

The rear doors are equipped with child<br />

safety locks that are operated by means<br />

of a catch adjacent to the door lock.<br />

Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key<br />

(in the remote control) and turn 45°.<br />

When the child safety lock is in the locked<br />

position, the door can only be opened from<br />

outside the car.<br />

Child safety locks


460_OM_MY09.book Page 52 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

52 Locks and car alarm<br />

Reprogramming lock system<br />

functions<br />

Certain lock system functions can be reprogrammed.<br />

We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop, see<br />

page 248.<br />

Checking the number of remote<br />

controls<br />

To check the number of remote controls that<br />

are programmed for the car:<br />

1 Insert the remote control into the ignition<br />

switch and turn it to position 3.<br />

2 Press and hold the button for more<br />

than 2 seconds within 30 seconds of<br />

turning the ignition switch to position 3.<br />

3 The DIC will now display the number of<br />

remote controls that are programmed for<br />

your car, and which of these (1–5) is in<br />

the ignition switch.<br />

Example of DIC message:<br />

Number of keys:<br />

Active key number:<br />

Changing the battery<br />

WARNING<br />

Keep the battery and other small components<br />

of the remote control out of reach of<br />

children.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The electronics of the remote control are<br />

sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Incorrect<br />

handling when changing the battery<br />

can damage the remote control. Avoid<br />

touching electronic components of the<br />

remote control with your hands.<br />

When the voltage of the remote control battery<br />

drops below a certain level, the DIC will<br />

display:<br />

Remote control battery<br />

low. Replace battery.<br />

Change the battery as soon as possible to<br />

avoid malfunctioning.<br />

Battery: For optimum performance in all<br />

temperatures and good service life, we<br />

recommend the use of a Sony or Panasonic<br />

CR2032, 3V lithium battery.<br />

The battery should last for about 4 years of<br />

normal use.<br />

The battery type is marked on the inside of<br />

the remote control. Avoid leaving fingerprints<br />

on the faces of the battery.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 53 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

53<br />

Press the emblem to remove the<br />

traditional key.<br />

1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the<br />

remote control to remove the traditional<br />

key.<br />

2 Insert the tip of the key into the small<br />

hole and turn the key to split the remote<br />

control.<br />

3 Change the battery. Insert it in same way<br />

as the old battery, with the positive (+)<br />

side facing down.<br />

4 Fit and press together the two halves of<br />

the remote control until you hear several<br />

clicks. Avoid pressing the buttons. Reinsert<br />

the traditional key into the remote<br />

control.<br />

5 After changing the battery in the remote<br />

control, it is only possible to use the<br />

remote control a limited number of times<br />

before synchronisation with the car is<br />

lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons<br />

on the remote control repeatedly directly<br />

after changing the battery.<br />

Unlock the car and insert the remote<br />

control into the ignition switch to synchronise<br />

the remote control and car.<br />

If the central locking system does not work<br />

after changing the battery and the car is<br />

locked, proceed as follows:<br />

1 Unlock the front left door with the traditional<br />

key. If the car has a car alarm, this<br />

will be tripped.<br />

2 Open the door and insert the remote<br />

control into the ignition switch. If the car<br />

has a car alarm, this will be silenced.<br />

The remote control and receiver unit are<br />

now synchronised.<br />

Change the battery and fit together to two<br />

halves of the remote control


460_OM_MY09.book Page 54 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

54 Locks and car alarm<br />

Immobilizer<br />

The remote control contains an electronic<br />

code that is unique to your car. When the<br />

remote control is inserted into the ignition<br />

switch, this code is checked and the LED<br />

double-flashes for 3 seconds. If the code is<br />

correct, the car can be started.<br />

Each time you remove the remote control<br />

from the ignition, the electronic starting<br />

interlock is activated, the LED doubleflashes<br />

for 3 seconds and the car becomes<br />

immobilised. If an incorrect remote control is<br />

now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g. the<br />

remote control of another car), the immobilizer<br />

will remain operative (the LED will not<br />

double-flash for 3 seconds) and it will not be<br />

possible to start the car.<br />

If, when inserted into the ignition switch,<br />

there is a problem checking the electronic<br />

code of the remote control, the following<br />

message will appear on the DIC:<br />

Key not accepted.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Visit an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop to<br />

have the problem checked and rectified.<br />

Car alarm 3<br />

The car alarm is available with or without a<br />

tilt sensor. Car alarms with a tilt sensor also<br />

have a separate siren. Car alarms without a<br />

tilt sensor use the car’s horn.<br />

WARNING<br />

Never leave a child or animal in the car. In<br />

sunny weather the temperature in the<br />

passenger and luggage compartments<br />

can climb to 70–80 °C.<br />

The car alarm is armed when the car is<br />

locked with the remote control.<br />

The car alarm will not be armed if you lock<br />

the car with the traditional key, see page 49.<br />

All the doors, the bonnet and the boot lid are<br />

monitored by the alarm. A movement<br />

sensor triggers the alarm if movement is<br />

detected in the cabin, such as if someone<br />

sticks in their arm through a smashed<br />

window.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 55 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

55<br />

All the windows should be shut when the<br />

alarm is armed. Otherwise, the movement<br />

sensor may interpret a passer-by as an<br />

attempted break-in.<br />

The alarm is armed 11 seconds after<br />

remote locking.<br />

During the delay period, the LED shines<br />

constantly. It will then start to flash once<br />

every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the<br />

fascia.<br />

If a door or the boot lid is open when the<br />

car is locked with the remote control,<br />

the LED will flash 3 times per second for<br />

11 seconds. Check that the doors, bonnet<br />

and boot lid are closed.<br />

If the signal persists, contact a workshop to<br />

have the problem checked and rectified. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Locking the boot lid<br />

If you unlock/open the boot lid from outside<br />

with button on the remote control, it will<br />

be unlocked when closed. Lock it by<br />

pressing button on the remote control.<br />

If the car has an alarm, it will be armed.<br />

To avoid any inconvenience, make sure that<br />

anyone using the car is familiar with how the<br />

car alarm and the locking system work.<br />

If the alarm has been triggered since the car<br />

was last locked, the DIC will display:<br />

Alarm tripped during<br />

last arming period.<br />

If the car alarm system malfunctions, the<br />

DIC will display:<br />

Theft protection failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Arming the car alarm<br />

The alarm is armed when all doors, the<br />

bonnet and the boot lid are closed and you<br />

lock the car with the remote control.<br />

What trips the alarm?<br />

The alarm will be tripped if:<br />

• A door, the bonnet or the boot lid is<br />

opened.<br />

• The movement sensor registers movement<br />

in the cabin.<br />

• The tilt sensor registers that the angle of<br />

the car has changed (if car alarm has tilt<br />

sensor).<br />

• Someone tampers with the alarm siren.<br />

• Somebody tries to hotwire the car.<br />

• The car battery is disconnected.<br />

Signals when the alarm is tripped<br />

If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm<br />

signals will be set off:<br />

• All direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.<br />

• The horn/siren sounds for 30-second<br />

intervals with 10-second breaks<br />

(max. 10 cycles).<br />

The signals can vary between markets<br />

and due to legal and insurance requirements.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 56 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

56 Locks and car alarm<br />

Switching off the alarm if tripped<br />

If the alarm has been triggered (direction<br />

indicators flashing and siren sounding) it<br />

can be turned off by pressing one of the<br />

buttons on the remote control or, if you are<br />

sitting in the car, by turning the ignition to<br />

position 3 (see below).<br />

Turns off lights and siren. Unlocks<br />

car.<br />

Turns off lights and siren. Car<br />

remains locked.<br />

Turns off lights and siren. Unlocks<br />

luggage compartment.<br />

Turns off lights and siren. Turns on<br />

exterior and cabin lighting. Car<br />

remains locked.<br />

If sitting in the car: Turn the remote<br />

control to position 3 in the ignition<br />

switch.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• The alarm can be disarmed and the<br />

car unlocked if you inadvertently press<br />

the unlocking button on the remote<br />

control while within range of the car.<br />

• If you lock the car in very severe cold,<br />

check that the doors lock properly.<br />

The lock buttons on the doors should<br />

all go down.<br />

Failing this, unlock and then lock the<br />

car again.<br />

Movement sensor 3<br />

The movement sensor monitors the cabin.<br />

The alarm will be triggered if a movement<br />

is detected, such as if someone sticks in<br />

their arm through a smashed window.<br />

Note:<br />

The movement sensor could also be<br />

triggered by an uninstalled cabin heater.<br />

To prevent a false alarm, switch off the<br />

movement sensor as described on page 57<br />

when the cabin heater is to be used.<br />

Tilt sensor 3<br />

The tilt sensor monitors the angle of the car.<br />

The tilt sensor will trigger the alarm if the<br />

angle of the car changes relative to its angle<br />

when it was locked, for example if it is raised<br />

with a jack.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 57 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

57<br />

Disabling the movement and tilt sensors<br />

If, for example, you leave a dog in the car,<br />

park on a ferry or use a cabin heater, you<br />

should disable the sensors as described<br />

below:<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Theft Alarm using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

5Select DOOR ONLY.<br />

6 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Theft Alarm 3<br />

FULL ALARM<br />

DOOR ONLY<br />

Movement and tilt sensors (if fitted) will be<br />

reactivated automatically the next time you<br />

start the car. You can activate the sensors<br />

manually as described above. Select FULL<br />

ALARM under Step 4 above.<br />

The functions of FULL ALARM and DOOR<br />

ONLY modes are explained below.<br />

FULL ALARM:<br />

The alarm will be triggered if a window<br />

is smashed and someone sticks in their<br />

arm to take something from the car. All<br />

windows and the sunroof should be<br />

shut when the car is locked in FULL<br />

ALARM mode.<br />

DOOR ONLY:<br />

In this mode, the movement and tilt<br />

sensors (if fitted) are disabled. This can<br />

be useful if you wish to leave a dog in<br />

the car or are travelling by ferry, for<br />

example.<br />

Panic function<br />

The alarm function also has a panic function.<br />

For cars without car alarm, we recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop. The panic function<br />

makes it possible to trigger the alarm to<br />

attract attention or the like.<br />

The panic alarm can only be activated while<br />

the car is stationary. The alarm is silenced if<br />

the car is driven off.<br />

When the alarm is tripped, the lights and<br />

siren come on for 3 minutes or until you<br />

press one of the remote control buttons.<br />

To start the alarm manually proceed as<br />

follows:<br />

• Press and hold the button on the<br />

remote control for more than 2 seconds,<br />

or if you are sitting in the car...<br />

• Press and hold the or button on<br />

the driver’s door for more than 2 seconds.<br />

To switch off the alarm:<br />

• Press one of the remote control buttons<br />

or, if you are sitting in the car, the<br />

or button on the driver’s door.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 58 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

58 Locks and car alarm<br />

Overview of functions<br />

Locking/arming<br />

Unlocking/<br />

disarming<br />

Unlocking/<br />

disarming<br />

boot lid<br />

Alarm triggered<br />

Movement<br />

sensor<br />

Tilt sensor<br />

Direction indicators flash once.<br />

Hazard warning lights flash twice.<br />

Hazard warning lights flash three times.<br />

Direction indicators flash for 5 min.<br />

The siren sounds for 30-second intervals with<br />

10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you<br />

press one of the remote control buttons or turn<br />

the remote control to position 3 in the ignition<br />

switch.<br />

The movement sensor trips the alarm if it<br />

registers a movement in the cabin.<br />

The tilt sensor trips the alarm if the angle of the<br />

car changes relative to its angle when it was<br />

locked.<br />

Remote control<br />

Remote control<br />

battery<br />

Car battery<br />

Normal range: 5–15 metres.<br />

In favourable conditions the range can be<br />

significantly greater.<br />

During remote opening and closing of the<br />

windows/sunroof 3/soft top, the range is<br />

reduced by approximately half of normal range.<br />

Normal life: approx. 4 years.<br />

The battery should be changed when the<br />

following message appears on the DIC:<br />

Remote control battery<br />

low. Replace battery.<br />

See Changing the battery, page 52.<br />

The alarm will trip if the battery is disconnected<br />

when the alarm is armed.<br />

Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop<br />

for details of the possibilities. See also page 248.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 59 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Quick guide of LED signals and DIC messages<br />

Activity<br />

Arming (delay period)<br />

Alarm armed<br />

Disarming<br />

Alarm not armed<br />

A door, the bonnet or the tailgate<br />

is open or opened during the<br />

delay period.<br />

Car immobilised but not locked.<br />

Change of status of immobilizer<br />

system, valid key inserted or<br />

removed from ignition switch.<br />

LED signal<br />

Shines for 11 s<br />

Flashes once every 3 s<br />

Extinguishes<br />

Off<br />

Flashes for 11 s, then flashes<br />

once every 3 s<br />

Off<br />

Double-flashes for 3 s<br />

DIC message<br />

Key not accepted.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Remote control battery<br />

low. Replace battery.<br />

Number of keys:<br />

Active key number:<br />

Alarm tripped during<br />

last arming period.<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

Reason/action<br />

Error when remote control<br />

inserted into ignition switch.<br />

Battery needs replacing. See<br />

page 52.<br />

59<br />

Check of the number of remote<br />

controls programmed for your<br />

car. See page 52.<br />

The alarm has been tripped<br />

since the car was last locked.<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> & Corvette <strong>Europe</strong> hereby declares that the original equipment used<br />

in the remote control, door locks and alarm, as well as the decoding equipment<br />

of the immobilizer system, fulfils the basic requirements stipulated in<br />

R&TTE, Directive 1999/5/EC of the <strong>Europe</strong>an Parliament and of the Council<br />

of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal<br />

equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 60 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

60 Locks and car alarm<br />

Opening the fuel filler<br />

flap manually 3<br />

(Sedan only)<br />

If the fuel filler flap, which is controlled by the<br />

central locking system, does not unlock,<br />

proceed as described below.<br />

Check fuse 7 in the fuse panel at the end of<br />

the fascia, see page 206. If this fuse has<br />

blown or the new fuse blows, the fuel filler<br />

flap can be opened as follows:<br />

1 Open the hatch on the right-hand side of<br />

the luggage compartment. Unlock the<br />

plastic rivet by depressing the centre no<br />

more than 3 mm. Take hold of the collar<br />

of the rivet and pull it out. Refer also to<br />

page 198.<br />

2 Slacken the two screws (do not unscrew<br />

them fully). Lift up the screws and press<br />

them out of their keys.<br />

The fuel filler flap can now be opened as<br />

usual.<br />

Contact a workshop to have the fault remedied.<br />

We recommend that you contact a<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Opening the fuel filler flap manually


460_OM_MY09.book Page 61 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

61<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

Warning and indicator<br />

lights _______________ 62<br />

Instruments ___________ 69<br />

DIC (Driver Information<br />

Centre)______________ 71<br />

Switches _____________ 78<br />

Wipers and washers ____ 83<br />

Automatic climate<br />

control (ACC) 3 ______ 87<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 62 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

62 Instruments and controls<br />

Main instrument panel<br />

Warning and indicator<br />

lights<br />

The warnings and indications that can be<br />

shown depend on the engine variant and<br />

equipment level.<br />

Main instrument panel<br />

1 Rev counter<br />

2 Speedometer<br />

3 Fuel gauge<br />

4 Engine temperature gauge<br />

5 Information window, DIC<br />

6 Trip meter reset button<br />

ABS brakes warning light<br />

This warning light illuminates when a fault<br />

arises in the anti-lock brake system.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Antilock brake malfunc.<br />

Contact service.<br />

The brake system will continue to function<br />

but without ABS modulation.<br />

Charging warning light<br />

This light comes on when the battery is not<br />

being charged by the alternator. If the light<br />

come on during driving, stop as soon as<br />

possible and switch off the engine.<br />

Check the drive belt, see page 188.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 63 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

63<br />

The light comes on if engine oil pressure is<br />

too low.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

If the indicator light flashes or illuminates<br />

while driving, stop immediately somewhere<br />

that does not impede traffic, switch off the<br />

engine and check the oil level. See<br />

page 180.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Oil pressure warning light<br />

(engine oil)<br />

Oil pressure low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Never drive the car when the oil pressure<br />

warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can<br />

cause serious engine damage.<br />

Engine malfunction<br />

(CHECK ENGINE)<br />

WARNING<br />

The CHECK ENGINE light indicates that<br />

there is an engine-related problem.<br />

Even if the car can be driven while the<br />

CHECK ENGINE light is illuminated,<br />

have it checked as soon as possible.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

If the fault is not rectified, more serious<br />

faults may arise affecting driveability.<br />

If driveability is affected the driver must<br />

be prepared to act (e.g. brake smoothly,<br />

engage neutral, stop in a suitable place,<br />

switch off the engine, etc.).<br />

The light illuminates to indicate a fault in the<br />

fuel or ignition system.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Reduced engine power.<br />

Contact service.<br />

The car can be driven with care, but engine<br />

performance will be limited. See page 129.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The car should be checked immediately<br />

to avoid serious faults. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

Main beam indicator light<br />

This light shows when the headlights are on<br />

main beam, see page 78.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 64 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

64 Instruments and controls<br />

Front fog lights 3<br />

This light indicates when the front fog lights<br />

are on, see page 81.<br />

Rear fog light indicator<br />

This lamp indicates when the rear fog light<br />

is on, see page 80.<br />

The rear fog light is switched off automatically<br />

when the engine is switched off. When<br />

the fog light is next needed, it will have to be<br />

switched on again manually.<br />

Brake warning light<br />

This warning lamp indicates when the brake<br />

fluid level is too low, see page 184.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Brake fluid level low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never drive the car when this light is<br />

illuminated - risk of brake failure.<br />

• If the level of brake fluid in the reservoir<br />

is below the MIN mark, the vehicle<br />

should be transported on a recovery<br />

vehicle.<br />

• Have the brake system checked<br />

immediately. We recommend that<br />

you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

For safety reasons, stop the car and check<br />

the level of the brake fluid, see page 184.<br />

If the level is normal, depress the brake<br />

pedal firmly two or three times. Now check<br />

the level again. If the level is still normal, you<br />

may drive the car with considerable caution<br />

to the nearest workshop to have the brake<br />

system checked. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The brake system provides Electronic<br />

Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distributes<br />

the brake pressure between the front<br />

and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve<br />

optimum braking performance irrespective<br />

of the car’s load.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 65 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

65<br />

Lights , and illuminate in the<br />

event of a fault in the EBD function.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Brake malfunction.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

If this occurs, drive carefully and contact<br />

a workshop as soon as possible. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop. Refer to Brake warning<br />

light on page 64, ABS brakes warning<br />

light on page 62 and TCS OFF or<br />

StabiliTrak ® OFF 3 indicator light on<br />

page 67.<br />

Seat belt reminder<br />

This light reminds the driver to buckle up.<br />

Handbrake warning light<br />

This light shines when the handbrake is<br />

applied, see page 153.<br />

The handbrake is mechanical and operates<br />

on the rear wheels.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always apply the handbrake on<br />

parking.<br />

• Always apply the handbrake before<br />

removing the remote control.<br />

• Do not apply the handbrake while the<br />

car is moving, see page 153.<br />

If the parking brake is engaged when the car<br />

starts off, the parking brake symbol in the<br />

main instrument panel illuminates and the<br />

following message appears in DIC:<br />

Release park brake.<br />

Airbag warning light<br />

This light comes on when a fault is detected<br />

in the airbag system.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Airbag malfunction.<br />

Contact service.<br />

WARNING<br />

• If a fault is indicated, the correct function<br />

of the airbag system cannot be<br />

guaranteed.<br />

• Have the system checked immediately<br />

at a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The light comes on for approx. 4 seconds<br />

when the ignition is turned to the start or<br />

drive position.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 66 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

66 Instruments and controls<br />

The light comes on when there is less than<br />

approx. 10 litres of fuel in the tank. See also<br />

DTE function (Distance to Empty) on<br />

page 72.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Fuel-low indicator light<br />

If the car runs out of fuel, air may be drawn<br />

in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause<br />

the catalytic converter to be damaged by<br />

overheating.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: If you run out of<br />

fuel, see page 136.<br />

Headlight and position<br />

light indicator<br />

This light indicates that the headlights or<br />

position lights are on.<br />

Cruise control indicator<br />

light 3<br />

This light comes on when the system is<br />

engaged, see page 144.<br />

Gear selector indicator<br />

(cars with automatic<br />

transmission)<br />

The selected gear position is displayed in<br />

the left-hand section of the information window.<br />

When gears are selected manually, the<br />

letter M (manual) and the selected gear are<br />

displayed, see page 143.<br />

TCS or StabiliTrak ®<br />

indicator light 3<br />

WARNING<br />

The system improves ride comfort and<br />

safety during normal driving. It must<br />

however not be regarded as a system<br />

to enable the driver to maintain higher<br />

speeds. The same precautions as<br />

normal for safe cornering and driving<br />

on slippery roads must be adopted, see<br />

pages 148/ 150.<br />

This symbol lights up when the system is<br />

operative.<br />

If the TCS or StabiliTrak ® system comes<br />

into action, it indicates that there is low friction<br />

between the tyres and road surface.<br />

Extra care must be taken.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 67 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

67<br />

TCS OFF or<br />

StabiliTrak ® OFF 3<br />

indicator light<br />

WARNING<br />

The system improves ride comfort and<br />

safety during normal driving. It must<br />

however not be regarded as a system<br />

to enable the driver to maintain higher<br />

speeds. The same precautions as<br />

normal for safe cornering and driving<br />

on slippery roads must be adopted, see<br />

pages 148/ 150.<br />

The symbol lights when:<br />

• a fault has been detected and has therefore<br />

been switched off<br />

• there is a fault in the ABS system<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

or<br />

Traction control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Stability control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Have the system checked at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

See also Traction Control System (TCS) on<br />

page 148 and StabiliTrak ® 3 on page 150.<br />

SPORT mode indicator 3<br />

SPORT indicator light lights up when the<br />

SPORT button is pressed, see page 144.<br />

In SPORT mode, gear changes in the automatic<br />

gearbox occur at higher speeds (rpm)<br />

(engine and gearbox have sportier characteristics).<br />

Cars equipped with CDC (continuous<br />

Damping control) have slightly harder<br />

damping adapted to the sportier characteristics<br />

of the car.<br />

SPORT mode is disengaged by pressing<br />

the SPORT button or when the engine is<br />

switched off.<br />

Indicator, glow plug<br />

(cars with diesel engine)<br />

This light comes on when the ignition switch<br />

is turned to position 3 and the temperature<br />

of the coolant is below +5 °C. Start the<br />

engine once the indicator light has gone out;<br />

see page 128.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 68 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

68 Instruments and controls<br />

Automatic tyre pressure<br />

monitoring 3<br />

The lamp illuminates if the tyre pressure in<br />

one or more tyres is too low or a fault has<br />

arisen in the tyre pressure system, see<br />

page 214.<br />

If the tyre pressure system has warned or<br />

alarmed due to low pressure then the pressure<br />

must be reset to the recommended<br />

level so that the warning/alarm disappears.<br />

Below is an example of the message simultaneously<br />

shown on the DIC:<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

front left. Check tyres.<br />

Auto checking of lights<br />

The warning and indicator lights shown<br />

above should come on when the ignition<br />

switch is turned to position 3. They should<br />

go out after about 4 seconds once the<br />

engine has started or after the fault-free<br />

self-diagnosis of each system or function.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 69 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

69<br />

Instruments<br />

Rev counter<br />

The rev counter displays the engine speed<br />

in thousands of revolutions per minute.<br />

A protective function (interruption of the fuel<br />

supply) limits the engine speed within the<br />

red zone.<br />

Speedometer<br />

The speedometer displays the speed of the<br />

car in miles per hour (mph). It receives information<br />

about vehicle speed from the ABS’s<br />

wheel sensors.<br />

Temperature gauge<br />

The temperature gauge shows the temperature<br />

of the coolant. The needle should be<br />

in the middle of the scale when the engine<br />

is at normal operating temperature.<br />

If the needle goes into the red zone (which<br />

can occur at high outside air temperatures<br />

or under heavy engine loads), choose the<br />

highest possible gear ratio and the lowest<br />

possible engine speed, and avoid changing<br />

down.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 70 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

70 Instruments and controls<br />

NOTICE<br />

If the needle goes into the red zone,<br />

despite these measures, stop the car in a<br />

suitable place and allow the engine to<br />

idle. If the needle continues to rise, switch<br />

off the engine.<br />

If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,<br />

stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and<br />

check the coolant level, see page 182.<br />

WARNING<br />

Never remove the expansion tank filler<br />

cap completely while the engine is warm.<br />

Slacken the cap carefully. The cooling<br />

system is pressurised - hot coolant and<br />

vapour can escape when the filler cap is<br />

released.<br />

Fuel gauge<br />

When less than about 10 litres of fuel is left<br />

in the tank, an warning light on the main<br />

instrument panel comes on.<br />

Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,<br />

the amount of fuel required to fill the tank<br />

may be less than the specified tank<br />

capacity.<br />

Refuelling, see page 133.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 71 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

DIC (Driver Information<br />

Centre)<br />

DIC displays various types of information:<br />

milometer, trip meter, warnings, indications,<br />

trip computer information.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

71<br />

Milometer and trip meter<br />

The milometer displays the distance travelled<br />

in miles, and the trip meter in miles<br />

and tenths of miles. It lights when the car<br />

is unlocked or when the door is opened<br />

and the car is unlocked. In other instances,<br />

it lights with a press of the reset button.<br />

If a message takes up two rows of text, it<br />

overrides the milometer and trip meter.<br />

• The engaged gear is displayed on the left<br />

(cars with automatic transmission).<br />

• The upper row displays trip computer<br />

information while the lower row displays<br />

the trip meter and milometer.<br />

When a message is displayed:<br />

If a message takes up two rows of text, it<br />

overrides the milometer and trip meter.<br />

• The symbol corresponding to the text<br />

message is displayed on the left.<br />

• The text message is displayed in the<br />

centre.<br />

The warnings and indications that can be<br />

shown on the DIC are listed on page 249.<br />

If there is more than one message, a plus<br />

sign is shown to the left of the first message.<br />

Each message is shown for 10 seconds.<br />

DIC, control unit and display<br />

Press the CLR button to acknowledge the<br />

DIC message. The text and the symbol or<br />

just the text disappears. If you acknowledge<br />

a message but do not rectify the problem,<br />

the message will be shown the next time the<br />

car is started.<br />

When the engine is switched off the warning/indicator<br />

lights still active are displayed,<br />

this is to remind the driver. At this point the<br />

warning/indicator lights previously acknowledged<br />

with the CLR button are also displayed.<br />

In some of the car’s systems, such as the<br />

alarm and rain sensor, you can make your<br />

own settings. See page 75.<br />

Reset button<br />

The reset button is positioned immediately<br />

to the left of the speedometer.<br />

Reset the trip meter by pressing the reset<br />

button once when the ignition is on.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 72 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

72 Instruments and controls<br />

Trip computer functions in DIC<br />

WARNING<br />

Trip computer settings should be made<br />

while the car is stationary so that you are<br />

not distracted from the traffic.<br />

DIC has the following functions:<br />

Temp<br />

D.T.E.<br />

(Distance<br />

To Empty)<br />

Fuel Ø<br />

Outside temperature<br />

Possible range with<br />

remaining fuel. When the<br />

possible range is less<br />

than 30 km, the text Refill<br />

fuel now is displayed<br />

Average fuel consumption<br />

since function last<br />

reset<br />

Dist<br />

Speed Ø<br />

SPD W<br />

Settings<br />

Phone 3<br />

Distance to destinations.<br />

Function can also be<br />

used as a trip meter<br />

Average speed<br />

Speed warning<br />

Settings such as alarm<br />

time, language, rain<br />

sensor 3<br />

Handling of e.g. number<br />

lists, see Infotainment<br />

manual<br />

When the engine is started, the function<br />

that was selected when the engine was<br />

switched off is displayed, with the following<br />

exceptions:<br />

• Temp is displayed if the outside temperature<br />

is between –3 °C and +3 °C<br />

• D.T.E. appears if the amount of fuel is only<br />

enough for max. 50 km<br />

Outside temperature<br />

WARNING<br />

Bear in mind that ice can develop on the<br />

road surface even at air temperatures<br />

over +3 °C, especially on bridges and<br />

shady stretches of road.<br />

The Temp function is always activated<br />

when the outside temperature is within<br />

the interval –3 °C and +3 °C.<br />

If the temperature sensor, located under<br />

the front bumper, is covered by snow or ice,<br />

temperature readings will be unreliable.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 73 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

73<br />

Setting values<br />

1 Select the function using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

• SPD W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h))<br />

• Dist (preset to 100 miles/100 km if not<br />

previously set)<br />

• Speed Ø<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3 Press the steering wheel buttons,<br />

or to change the value (the value can<br />

be reset with button CLR).<br />

4 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Using DIST as a trip meter<br />

1Select Dist using the steering wheel<br />

buttons, or .<br />

2 Press and hold the CLR button for<br />

approx. 1 second.<br />

An arrow will now appear on the right-hand<br />

side of the display, indicating that the trip<br />

meter is running.<br />

Resetting a single function<br />

1 Select the function to be reset using the<br />

steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

• Fuel Ø (the value is reset<br />

to 10l/100 km)<br />

• Speed Ø<br />

• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)<br />

2 Press and hold the CLR button for<br />

approx. 1 second.<br />

The selected function will now be reset.<br />

Resetting the trip computer<br />

1 Press and hold the CLR button (approx.<br />

3 seconds) until audible confirmation is<br />

given.<br />

The following functions will be reset:<br />

• Fuel Ø (the value is reset<br />

to 10l/100 km)<br />

• Speed Ø<br />

• D.T.E. (the value is reset to the distance<br />

that can be reached with the amount<br />

of remaining fuel if fuel consumption is<br />

10 l/100 km; lower fuel consumption<br />

increases this distance)<br />

• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 74 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

74 Instruments and controls<br />

Speed warning<br />

This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h).<br />

The value can be set to between<br />

0 and 150 mph (0–250 km/h).<br />

On some markets, the value is locked<br />

at 120 km/h and cannot be changed.<br />

1Select SPD W using the steering wheel<br />

buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until<br />

a chime sounds.<br />

3 Select speed using the steering wheel<br />

buttons, or .<br />

4 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

The word ON on the right-hand side of the<br />

display indicates when the speed warning<br />

function is active.<br />

An audible alarm will sound if the set speed<br />

is exceeded.<br />

Disengage the function with the CLR button.<br />

Re-engage the function using the SET<br />

button.<br />

Calculating the arrival time<br />

(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to<br />

drive?)<br />

This function should be used before starting<br />

out a journey.<br />

To calculate the arrival time, the distance<br />

must first be given.<br />

1Select Dist using the steering wheel<br />

buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

1 Set how long it takes to get to the destination<br />

using the steering wheel buttons,<br />

or .<br />

2 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

The estimated arrival time is displayed on<br />

the right-hand side of the display.<br />

If you take a break, this time is added to the<br />

estimated arrival time.<br />

During the trip, you can select Dist to display<br />

the estimated arrival time as well as<br />

how much longer you have to drive.<br />

After the distance to destination has<br />

decreased to zero, Dist will function as a trip<br />

meter (seeUsing DIST as a trip meter). The<br />

starting value for the trip meter will be the<br />

last distance set for the Dist function.<br />

Example: The Dist function is set to 100 km.<br />

After the count-down has reached 0 km,<br />

Dist will act as a trip meter beginning<br />

at 100 km.<br />

Calculating the arrival time if a specified<br />

average speed is maintained<br />

(When will I arrive if I know how far I have<br />

to drive and know what my average speed<br />

will be?)<br />

This function should be used before starting<br />

out a journey.<br />

First, set the distance under Dist.<br />

1 Then select the Speed Ø function using<br />

the steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3 Set an estimated average speed using<br />

the steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

The time of arrival is updated during the<br />

journey based on the average speed since<br />

Dist was set. The speed of the car must<br />

exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).<br />

By selecting Dist during the journey, you<br />

can see how far is left.<br />

When Dist reaches zero Dist acts as a trip<br />

meter. The trip meter starts from the distance<br />

that was set previously.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 75 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Settings<br />

Parameters such as language and unit of<br />

measure are selected via this heading.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3 Select the desired heading using the<br />

steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5 Make the desired settings using the<br />

steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

6 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Settings<br />

Block Heater, page 253.<br />

MANUAL START<br />

TIMER A, B or C<br />

Park Heater, page 253.<br />

MANUAL START<br />

TIMER A, B or C<br />

Rain Sensor, page 84.<br />

HIGH<br />

MEDIUM<br />

LOW<br />

Theft Alarm, page 54.<br />

FULL ALARM<br />

DOOR ONLY<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

Park Assistance, page 155.<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Alarm Clock, page 76.<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Language.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

DEUTSCH<br />

SVENSKA<br />

FRANÇAIS<br />

ITALIANO<br />

ESPAÑOL<br />

Speed Scale Illumin.<br />

0-260 km/h<br />

0-140 km/h<br />

75


460_OM_MY09.book Page 76 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

76 Instruments and controls<br />

Units.<br />

METRIC<br />

US<br />

IMPERIAL<br />

Next Service: xx %<br />

INTERMEDIATE<br />

MAIN<br />

MAIN & INTERMED.<br />

Time for Service<br />

Reset Service Check?<br />

YES NO<br />

TCS,page 148<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ESP (StabiliTrak ® ), page 150<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Alarm<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Alarm Clock using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5 Make the desired settings.<br />

6 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

The alarm function is now active. Switch off<br />

the alarm with a brief press on the CLR button.<br />

To activate the same alarm time on another<br />

day, select Settings and then Alarm Clock.<br />

Then briefly press the SET button.<br />

Explanation of the various selections under<br />

Settings.<br />

Language<br />

Select the desired language. The<br />

number of languages can vary<br />

between markets.<br />

Units<br />

Select the desired group of units.<br />

Next Service: xx %<br />

The DIC includes two mutually<br />

independent counters, one for the<br />

main service and one for the intermediate<br />

service. When a service is<br />

carried out, e.g. intermediate<br />

service, the counter is reset for the<br />

intermediate service. The counter<br />

for the other service type, main<br />

service, continues unaffected. This<br />

means that once a service has<br />

been carried out, the counter may<br />

show e.g. 47% even though a<br />

service has just been carried out.<br />

The percentage refers, then, to the<br />

other service type.<br />

MAIN<br />

Main services are carried out at<br />

specific meter settings. This<br />

interval varies depending on<br />

market and engine variant. Contact<br />

a workshop for more information.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 77 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

INTERMEDIATE<br />

The intermediate service, on the<br />

other hand, is carried out<br />

depending on the number of cold<br />

starts and the climate conditions in<br />

which the car is driven, for example.<br />

This is why the interval for this type<br />

of service varies.<br />

MAIN & INTERMED.<br />

A combined service is carried out<br />

when the counters of both service<br />

types are close to one another.<br />

Time for Service<br />

A message regarding Time for<br />

Service must only be reset after a carried<br />

out service.<br />

Reset Service Check?<br />

Resetting the service indication,<br />

see this page.<br />

Resetting the service check<br />

Reset the service check as follows:<br />

1 Turn the remote control to position. The<br />

engine must be switched off.<br />

2 Keep the brake pedal depressed (cars<br />

with diesel engine only).<br />

3Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

5Select Time for Service. Press the SET<br />

button.<br />

6Select Reset Service Check? Press<br />

the SET button.<br />

7 When asked Reset Service Check?<br />

select YES.<br />

8 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

9 Release the brake pedal (cars with<br />

diesel engine only).<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

77<br />

Analogue clock<br />

The analogue clock is set manually. It is not<br />

linked to the clock in the radio display.<br />

A brief press on the button beneath the<br />

clock will move the minute indicator forward<br />

one minute. Hold the button depressed for a<br />

major adjustment. The clock cannot be<br />

adjusted back in time.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 78 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

78 Instruments and controls<br />

Switches<br />

Lights off<br />

The car’s exterior lights are off.<br />

The headlights can be flashed.<br />

Position lights<br />

The position lights can be turned on irrespective<br />

of the position of the ignition<br />

switch. If the position lights are on and the<br />

driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn<br />

them off will sound.<br />

Do not use the positions lights alone while<br />

driving.<br />

Light switches<br />

Headlights<br />

Dipped beam comes on when the ignition is<br />

switched on and goes off when the ignition<br />

switch is turned all the way back.<br />

Dip switch<br />

1 Headlight flasher<br />

2 Main/dipped beam<br />

Main/dipped beam<br />

To switch between main and dipped beam,<br />

pull the dip switch all the way towards the<br />

steering wheel.<br />

The symbol on the main instrument<br />

panel shows when the main beam is on.<br />

Headlight flasher<br />

To flash your headlights, pull the dip switch<br />

half-way towards the steering wheel. The<br />

main beam will remain on until you release<br />

the switch.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 79 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Follow-me-home lighting<br />

The "Follow-me-home" delay function<br />

allows the headlights to remain on dipped<br />

beam and the reversing lights to remain on<br />

for about 30 seconds after the driver’s door<br />

has been closed.<br />

1 Remove the remote control.<br />

2 Open the driver’s door.<br />

3 Pull the dip switch all the way towards<br />

the steering wheel.<br />

The function is active for 30 seconds after<br />

the door is closed.<br />

Adjusting instrument illumination<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

79<br />

Instrument illumination<br />

The brightness of the instrument illumination<br />

can be adjusted by pressing the button.<br />

Headlight levelling 3<br />

Cars with halogen lights<br />

This system enables the angle of the headlight<br />

beam to be adjusted depending on how<br />

the car is loaded.<br />

Turn the light switch anticlockwise to the<br />

desired position. Note: The switch cannot<br />

be turned past position 3.<br />

The system comprises an adjustment motor<br />

for each headlight and a control on the<br />

instrument panel. Adjustments must be<br />

made when the ignition is in position 3.<br />

Special equipment is required for adjusting<br />

the basic headlight alignment.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 80 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

80 Instruments and controls<br />

The switch’s three settings are designed for<br />

the following loads:<br />

Number of<br />

passengers<br />

1 2-3 rear seat<br />

passengers<br />

and possibly<br />

1 front seat<br />

passenger.<br />

2 2-3 rear seat<br />

passengers.<br />

Load<br />

Max. 30 kg.<br />

40-80 kg in<br />

luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

3 1-2 Maximum load<br />

in luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

or<br />

1-4 Maximum load<br />

in luggage<br />

compartment and<br />

a caravan or trailer.<br />

If the car has halogen lights and headlight<br />

beam length adjustment in combination with<br />

all-wheel drive (AWD) 3 then beam length<br />

adjustment only needs to be carried out with<br />

the following loads to reduce the risk of dazzling<br />

other road users:<br />

Position<br />

Position<br />

Number of<br />

passengers<br />

Load<br />

1 1–4 Maximum load in<br />

luggage<br />

compartment and/or<br />

a caravan or trailer.<br />

Cars with Xenon headlights 3<br />

Cars with Xenon headlights have an automatic<br />

headlight levelling system 3. This<br />

system is calibrated automatically each<br />

time the engine is started.<br />

If a fault arises in the automatic headlight<br />

levelling system, the headlights will be<br />

angled down to avoid dazzling drivers in<br />

oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accordingly<br />

as the range of the headlights will be<br />

reduced. Check fuse 20 in the engine bay<br />

electrical centre, see page 208.<br />

If the system malfunctions, the following<br />

message will appear on the DIC:<br />

Headlight levelling<br />

malfunction.<br />

Rear fog light<br />

To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear<br />

fog light button on the instrument panel. The<br />

headlights or front fog lights must be on.<br />

The rear fog light is automatically turned off<br />

when the engine is switched off. When the<br />

car is next started, the rear fog light will have<br />

to be switched back on manually by pressing<br />

the rear fog light switch. If the engine is<br />

restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog<br />

light will remain on.<br />

Acquaint yourself with the legal<br />

provisions governing the use of rear<br />

fog lights.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 81 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

81<br />

WARNING<br />

In poor visibility, avoid following the tail<br />

lights of the vehicle in front. There is a risk<br />

of driving too close. If the vehicle brakes<br />

suddenly, you may be unable to avoid a<br />

collision and therefore risk injury to yourself<br />

and others.<br />

Front fog lights 3<br />

Some model variants have fog lights fitted in<br />

the front spoiler. These should be used in<br />

poor visibility.<br />

The fog lights are automatically turned off<br />

when the engine is switched off. When the<br />

car is next started, the fog lights will have to<br />

be switched back on manually by pressing<br />

the fog light switch. If the engine is restarted<br />

within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will<br />

remain on.<br />

Acquaint yourself with the legal<br />

provisions governing the use of front<br />

fog lights.<br />

Direction indicators<br />

1 Right<br />

2 Left<br />

Direction indicators<br />

The stalk switch has an intermediate,<br />

spring-loaded position that is useful for signalling<br />

when changing lanes or overtaking.<br />

The stalk switch also has fixed positions for<br />

indicating a right or left turn, that are cancelled<br />

automatically when the steering<br />

wheel is centred.<br />

If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency<br />

with which the indicators flash will be doubled.<br />

This frequency is also doubled if a caravan<br />

or trailer is being towed and one of its indicator<br />

bulbs breaks.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 82 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

82 Instruments and controls<br />

Priority of audible information<br />

If two or more of these functions are active<br />

simultaneously, the most important function<br />

at that time will be prioritized.<br />

If, for example, the direction indicators are<br />

active when you engage reverse, the parking<br />

aid system (if fitted) will be heard instead<br />

of the direction indicators. When reverse is<br />

disengaged, the direction indicators will be<br />

heard, if they are still active.<br />

Hazard warning lights<br />

The button for the hazard warning lights<br />

is located on the climate control panel.<br />

When the button is pressed, all the direction<br />

indicators and the symbol in the button flash<br />

simultaneously.<br />

If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency<br />

with which the indicators flash will be doubled.<br />

Hazard warning lights should only be used<br />

if, because of an accident or breakdown, the<br />

car constitutes a hazard to other road users.<br />

Warning triangle 3<br />

The warning triangle is stowed on the<br />

luggage compartment floor.<br />

WARNING<br />

Position the warning triangle at the side of<br />

the road 50–100 metres behind the car to<br />

give advance warning to approaching<br />

vehicles. If the car is not clearly visible<br />

(e.g. over the brow of a hill or a bridge),<br />

place the triangle even further back.<br />

Reversing lights<br />

The reversing lights come on automatically<br />

when reverse gear is engaged or selected.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 83 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Wipers and washers<br />

Windscreen wipers<br />

Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that<br />

will produce a single sweep of the wipers.<br />

Set the delay period for intermittent wiping<br />

using the thumb wheel on the stalk switch.<br />

There are 5 delay periods from which to<br />

choose, ranging from 2 to 15 seconds.<br />

The wipers always return to their home<br />

position when the ignition is turned off.<br />

To leave the wipers positioned vertically on<br />

the windscreen, proceed as follows:<br />

1 Switch off the engine and remove the<br />

remote control.<br />

2 Activate the wipers within the next<br />

16 seconds by pressing the stalk<br />

switch down.<br />

The next time the ignition is turned on, the<br />

stalk switch must be pressed down once so<br />

that the wipers return to their home position.<br />

Changing wiper blades, see page 188.<br />

Windscreen wipers<br />

0 OFF<br />

1 Single sweep<br />

2 Intermittent wiping<br />

3 Low speed<br />

4 High speed<br />

5 Windscreen and headlight washers 3<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

83<br />

Washers<br />

Activate the washers by pulling the stalk<br />

switch towards the steering wheel.<br />

When the washers are operated, the wipers<br />

will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on<br />

how long the washers were kept on. If<br />

the speed of the car is less than 12 mph<br />

(20 km/h), the wipers will make an additional<br />

sweep after roughly 8 seconds.<br />

If the amount of fluid is less than 1 litre,<br />

headlight washing 3 is not activated as a<br />

means of prioritizing washing of the windscreen.<br />

The following message appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Washer fluid level low.<br />

Refill.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 84 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

84 Instruments and controls<br />

Rain sensor 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is<br />

ON to avoid personal injury when clearing<br />

snow and ice from the windscreen.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Control for setting intermittent wiper delay.<br />

Washers, headlights 3<br />

The headlights are washed at the same time<br />

as the windscreen if the headlights are on.<br />

The headlight washers are activated when<br />

the windscreen washers have been active<br />

for 0.6 s.<br />

The headlights are washed every fifth time<br />

the windscreen washers are used or if<br />

2 minutes have elapsed since the windscreen<br />

was last washed.<br />

The headlight washers are not activated at<br />

speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).<br />

Turn the rain sensor off before washing<br />

the car in an automatic car wash, to avoid<br />

damaging the windscreen wipers.<br />

The indicator in the DIC is lit when the<br />

rain sensor is activated.<br />

The rain sensor automatically controls the<br />

windscreen wipers. The sensor is located<br />

on the windscreen beside the rear view mirror.<br />

The system varies the frequency of wiping<br />

between single sweeps and continuous<br />

wiping, depending on the amount of precipitation.<br />

Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk<br />

switch to the AUTO position. The wipers<br />

make one sweep for reference to see how<br />

much water is on the windscreen. In future,<br />

the sensor compares the amount of water<br />

on the windscreen with this reference value.<br />

Windscreen wipers with rain sensor<br />

0 OFF<br />

1 Single sweep<br />

2 AUTO - rain sensor engaged<br />

3 Low speed<br />

4 High speed<br />

5 Windscreen and headlight washers 3<br />

If the stalk switch is left in the AUTO position<br />

when the engine is switched off, when the<br />

engine is next started it must first be moved<br />

to the 0 or 3 position and then back to AUTO<br />

to reactivate the sensor.<br />

If the system malfunctions, the wipers will<br />

operate at low speed when the stalk switch<br />

is set to the AUTO position.<br />

The following message appears on the DIC<br />

at the same time:<br />

Rain sensor malfunc.<br />

Contact service.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 85 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

85<br />

Adjusting sensitivity<br />

The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be<br />

adjusted in Settings. If you increase the<br />

sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep<br />

for reference.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Rain Sensor using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5 Select sensitivity using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

6 Confirm this selection by pressing the<br />

SET button.<br />

Rain Sensor<br />

HIGH<br />

MEDIUM<br />

LOW<br />

Explanation of sensor sensitivity.<br />

HIGH<br />

The sensor is set to high sensitivity.<br />

The wipers start when there is only a<br />

small amount of water on the windscreen.<br />

MEDIUM<br />

The sensor has normal sensitivity.<br />

LOW<br />

The sensor is set to low sensitivity.<br />

The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected<br />

by the amount of daylight. The sensor is<br />

somewhat more sensitive at night. This<br />

adjustment is automatic.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 86 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

86 Instruments and controls<br />

Rear window wiper, Wagon<br />

To obtain:<br />

• a single sweep: move the control to position<br />

2, the control springs back to the<br />

home position.<br />

• intermittent wiping, 6 seconds: move the<br />

control to position 2.<br />

If the windscreen wipers are activated<br />

then the rear window wiper will automatically<br />

change over to intermittent wiping<br />

when reverse gear is engaged and the<br />

engine is running.<br />

• washing and wiping: move the control to<br />

position 3.<br />

The control returns to the home position.<br />

The wiper makes 3 sweeps after the<br />

washing has finished. If the speed of the<br />

car is below 40 km/h when the washing<br />

has finished the wiper makes an extra<br />

sweep after 5 seconds to wipe off any<br />

washer fluid residue.<br />

The washer jet is not adjustable.<br />

Changing wiper blades, see page 188.<br />

When the washer fluid level drops below 1<br />

litre, the rear window washer is deactivated.<br />

This is in order to prioritize the windscreen.<br />

The following message is displayed on the<br />

DIC:<br />

Washer fluid level low.<br />

Refill.<br />

Rear window wiper, Wagon<br />

1 OFF<br />

2 Intermittent wiping<br />

3 Washing and wiping


460_OM_MY09.book Page 87 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Automatic climate<br />

control (ACC) 3<br />

The Automatic Climate Control system<br />

(ACC) maintains the desired temperature<br />

inside the car, regardless of the outside<br />

temperature and weather conditions.<br />

The system will achieve the desired temperature<br />

in the quickest possible way. Note that<br />

selecting a higher or lower temperature than<br />

that desired will not speed up the process.<br />

For the ACC system to be most effective, all<br />

windows (and sunroof, if fitted) should be<br />

closed.<br />

Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an<br />

inlet grille adjacent to the bottom edge of the<br />

windscreen. It passes through a filter before<br />

reaching the ACC system and delivery into<br />

the cabin. The air is evacuated via openings<br />

in the rear parcel shelf and then on through<br />

outlets on both sides of the car behind the<br />

rear bumper.<br />

The incoming air is treated in three stages:<br />

first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified<br />

and cooled; and finally, if required,<br />

it is heated.<br />

The filter is a combined particle and charcoal<br />

filter. It is so efficient that levels of noxious<br />

substances such as benzene and toluene<br />

are also reduced.<br />

ACC panel<br />

1 Temperature setting: left-hand side<br />

2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically<br />

3 <strong>Manual</strong> setting of fan speed<br />

4 <strong>Manual</strong> setting of air distribution<br />

5 Temperature setting: right-hand side<br />

To reduce potential misting on the insides of<br />

the windows, the glass should be cleaned<br />

with a proprietary glass cleaner. How often<br />

this will need to be done depends on how<br />

clean the air is - if there are smokers in the<br />

car, the windows will need to be cleaned<br />

more frequently.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

6 Recirculation: ON/OFF<br />

7 Heated front seat 3, right side<br />

8 Rear window heating: ON/OFF<br />

9 A/C compressor: ON/OFF<br />

10 Heated front seat 3, left side<br />

87


460_OM_MY09.book Page 88 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

88 Instruments and controls<br />

1 Sun sensor<br />

2 Cabin temperature sensor<br />

The system has seven sensors:<br />

• Outside air temperature sensor.<br />

• Cabin temperature sensor (above rear<br />

view mirror).<br />

• Sun sensor (mounted on top of the<br />

fascia).<br />

• Two blended air temperature sensors<br />

(located in the front floor vents).<br />

• Two blended air temperature sensors<br />

(located in the outer panel vents).<br />

Note:<br />

The climate control system will not function<br />

properly if the sun sensor is covered.<br />

Panel vent<br />

Panel vents<br />

The air vents can be adjusted so that airflow<br />

can be directed as desired. In winter, for<br />

instance, the outer vents can be directed<br />

onto the door windows for enhanced<br />

demisting.<br />

The amount of air delivered via the panel<br />

vents can be individually controlled by the<br />

regulator on each one. The climate control<br />

system works best if the panel vents are<br />

open. If you find the air cold or that it is<br />

draughty, start by directing the air away<br />

from the body.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 89 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Temperature control<br />

The cabin is divided into two temperature<br />

zones:<br />

• Driver’s zone;<br />

• Passenger zone (front and rear seats).<br />

The temperature can be controlled within<br />

the interval 16 and 26 °C.<br />

The selected temperature is not the actual<br />

air temperature, but corresponds to the<br />

comfort level normally experienced at that<br />

temperature after allowance has been<br />

made for the air flow, relative humidity, solar<br />

radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside<br />

the car.<br />

• The most usual temperature setting<br />

is 18–24 °C, depending on personal<br />

preference and what clothing is worn.<br />

• It is recommended that changes in the<br />

temperature setting be made in steps<br />

of 1 °C.<br />

Once the desired climate has been<br />

achieved, the rear centre vents can be<br />

closed to prevent warm air being distributed<br />

at face height.<br />

When the ignition is switched off, only the<br />

temperature control affects the system the<br />

next time the engine is started. The system<br />

will warm up/cool down to the temperature<br />

to which the control is set.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

89<br />

MAX heating (red indicator)<br />

The MAX heating setting is obtained by<br />

turning the temperature control to the first<br />

position past 26 (to the red LED). The<br />

driver’s side selection regulates air distribution<br />

and recirculation status. Temperature,<br />

however, can be adjusted on the passenger<br />

side.<br />

Settings when MAX heating is selected:<br />

• Maximum heat.<br />

• Air distribution to windscreen and floor.<br />

• Recirculation OFF.<br />

• High fan speed.<br />

MAX cooling (blue indicator)<br />

The MAX cooling setting is obtained by turning<br />

the temperature control to the first position<br />

past 16 (to the blue LED). The driver’s<br />

side selection regulates air distribution and<br />

recirculation status. Temperature, however,<br />

can be adjusted on the passenger side.<br />

Settings when MAX cooling is selected:<br />

• Max. cooling effect (A/C compressor will<br />

run even if AC OFF has been selected).<br />

• Air distribution through panel vents.<br />

• Maximum fan speed.<br />

• Recirculation ON.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 90 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Functions<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> settings are not affected by the system’s automation.<br />

Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.<br />

The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.<br />

Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recirculation<br />

will be controlled automatically.<br />

Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual<br />

selections.<br />

The ACC system is in AUTO mode when the engine is<br />

started.<br />

A/C compressor OFF.<br />

No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution and<br />

fan speed still under automatic control.<br />

Turn the fan control anticlockwise until "OFF" lights up.<br />

ACC system OFF.<br />

Fan OFF.<br />

A/C compressor OFF.<br />

Air distribution selections locked in current settings.<br />

Recirculation can be selected manually.<br />

Front seat heating 3.<br />

Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into automatic<br />

mode.<br />

Reactivation by turning the fan control clockwise one<br />

click causes the system to resume any manual selections.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

90<br />

The rear window and door mirror heating is controlled<br />

manually.<br />

Deactivate the heating as soon as the rear window is<br />

free of ice and misting so as not to unnecessarily load<br />

the battery. Heating will deactivate automatically after<br />

a set time period.<br />

Turn the fan control to increase fan speed.<br />

If fan speed 0 is selected, the A/C compressor will be<br />

disengaged and the indicator on the AC OFF button will<br />

illuminate.<br />

Recirculation is controlled manually to optimize cooling<br />

although it can also be switched on and off manually.<br />

Recirculation does not appreciably change the air<br />

quality, but it can be beneficial to activate it manually to<br />

prevent unpleasant smells from entering the cabin.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 91 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

91 Instruments and controls<br />

Air distribution<br />

One press: When the defroster is chosen manually,<br />

all the windows (except the rear side windows,<br />

where the air flow is off) are demisted by:<br />

• High fan speed.<br />

• The air is directed to the defroster vents.<br />

• Temperature increases somewhat.<br />

• Recirculation OFF.<br />

• Activation of rear window/door mirror heating.<br />

The defroster function remains engaged until<br />

another selection is made. Heating of the rear<br />

window/door mirrors will, however, deactivate after<br />

a set time period.<br />

Two presses: Air is directed to the windscreen<br />

without the fan speed being increase or the rear<br />

window heating being switched on.<br />

To revert to a previous setting, press the AUTO button.<br />

Defroster and floor vents<br />

Floor<br />

Floor and panel vents


460_OM_MY09.book Page 92 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

92<br />

Initial settings in cold weather<br />

To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster setting,<br />

maximum heat and low fan speed.<br />

As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor<br />

vents and the fan speed will be increased.<br />

As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the<br />

fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by<br />

the system.<br />

Panel<br />

Initial settings in hot weather<br />

The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents<br />

at high fan speed and will activate the A/C compressor (unless the<br />

AC ON switch has been pressed).<br />

If the ambient air temperature is over 25 °C, the recirculation cuts in<br />

after 0-15 seconds, if this is required in order to reach the desired<br />

temperature.<br />

As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan<br />

speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.<br />

Defroster-floor-panel


460_OM_MY09.book Page 93 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Formation of ice and mist in<br />

extreme weather conditions<br />

It is only in the most extreme conditions that<br />

icing and misting of window glass are likely<br />

to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or<br />

severe cold coupled with high relative<br />

humidity, or when passengers are perspiring<br />

heavily or wearing wet clothes. The following<br />

measures are recommended if such<br />

problems should occur:<br />

1 Select AUTO and set the temperature<br />

to 21 °C.<br />

2 Select . If this is not enough ...<br />

3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not<br />

enough ...<br />

4 Select a higher temperature.<br />

Electric heating,<br />

front seats 3<br />

The seat cushions and backrests of the front<br />

seats are heated.<br />

Heating is thermostatically controlled.<br />

Heating has two settings.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

93<br />

Calibration<br />

The ACC system is calibrated automatically<br />

every 40th start (if the ignition has been off<br />

for more than 2 hours) or if the battery has<br />

been disconnected.<br />

The system can be calibrated manually by<br />

pressing the AUTO button and recirculation<br />

button simultaneously.<br />

For instructions regarding using and<br />

programming the Park Heater and Block<br />

Heater, refer to page 252.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 94 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

94 Instruments and controls<br />

(This page has been left blank)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 95 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

95<br />

Interior equipment<br />

Steering wheel<br />

adjustment __________ 96<br />

Electric windows_______ 97<br />

Rear view mirrors ______ 100<br />

Sunroof 3 ____________ 102<br />

Interior lighting ________ 105<br />

Can holder 3 __________ 106<br />

Ashtrays 3____________ 107<br />

Storage compartments__ 108<br />

Luggage compartment __ 110<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 96 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

96 Interior equipment<br />

Steering wheel<br />

adjustment<br />

WARNING<br />

Only adjust the steering wheel while the<br />

car is stationary so that you are not distracted<br />

from the traffic.<br />

The height and reach of the steering wheel<br />

can be adjusted.<br />

There is a release lever under the steering<br />

column.<br />

1 Pull down the lever to release the<br />

steering wheel.<br />

2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.<br />

3 Raise the lever to the locked position<br />

to lock the steering wheel in position.<br />

When returning the lever to the locked<br />

position, it may be necessary to adjust<br />

the position of the steering wheel slightly<br />

for the lock mechanism to engage correctly.<br />

Steering wheel lock, see page 126.<br />

Lever for steering wheel adjustment<br />

Horn<br />

Activate the horn by pressing one of the<br />

three areas on the steering wheel pad.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 97 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Electric windows<br />

Interior equipment<br />

97<br />

WARNING<br />

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when<br />

closing the side windows. Risk of serious<br />

or fatal injuries!<br />

• Always remove the remote control<br />

from the ignition switch when leaving<br />

the car. This prevents the electric windows<br />

from being activated, such as by<br />

children playing.<br />

• The person operating the electric<br />

window is responsible for ensuring<br />

that no one, especially a child, has<br />

their head, hands or fingers in the<br />

window openings, before raising the<br />

window.<br />

• Do not stick any part of the body or the<br />

head out through an open window<br />

while the car is moving.<br />

The electric windows are operated by<br />

means of switches in the door armrests.<br />

For the electric windows to work, the remote<br />

control must be in position 3 in the ignition<br />

switch.<br />

At the end of a journey and having removed<br />

the remote control, you can still operate the<br />

windows, so long as neither of the front<br />

doors has been opened.<br />

Window switches<br />

Windows having the automatic closing function<br />

(option) can be operated as long as the<br />

car is unlocked up to 20 minutes after the<br />

remote control has been removed from the<br />

ignition switch.<br />

To open<br />

Press down the front edge of the button one<br />

step.<br />

The window will stop when it is fully open or<br />

when the button is released.<br />

Automatic opening: Press the button all<br />

the way down and release it.<br />

Window switch in rear door<br />

Comfort opening 3<br />

Comfort opening is the remote opening of<br />

windows and the sunroof 3.<br />

Press and hold the unlocking button on the<br />

remote control until the windows and<br />

sunroof 3 start to open (approx. 2 s).<br />

During comfort opening and closing of the<br />

windows/sunroof 3, the range is reduced by<br />

approximately half of normal range.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 98 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

98 Interior equipment<br />

To close<br />

WARNING<br />

Take care when closing a window to<br />

ensure that no one gets caught.<br />

Raise the front edge of the button one step.<br />

The window will stop when it is fully closed<br />

or when the button is released.<br />

Automatic closing 3: Raise the button all<br />

the way and release it. If the window does<br />

not close automatically, refer to Calibration<br />

on page 99.<br />

Comfort closing 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure no one is so close to the car<br />

that they can be injured if comfort closing<br />

is activated.<br />

Comfort closing of the front windows means<br />

that open windows and the sunroof 3 are<br />

closed and the electrically retractable door<br />

mirrors 3 are retracted.<br />

Press and hold the locking button on the<br />

remote control until the windows are<br />

closed and door mirrors retracted (takes<br />

roughly 2 s). The doors must be shut.<br />

During comfort opening and closing of the<br />

windows/sunroof 3, the range is reduced<br />

by approximately half of normal range.<br />

Confirmation that closing has finished is<br />

provided by the direction indicators, which<br />

flash once. No confirmation indicates that<br />

closing was not possible. This may be due<br />

to a door being open or a window requiring<br />

calibration.<br />

Deactivating the rear window<br />

switches<br />

The in the driver’s door deactivates the<br />

window switches in the rear doors.<br />

The illuminated switch will change colour<br />

from green to orange (deactivated).<br />

Pinch protection 3<br />

On certain model variants, the front electric<br />

windows are equipped with pinch protection.<br />

This is activated if something gets<br />

trapped between the window pane and door<br />

frame when the window is closed. The<br />

window will stop and lower slightly.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 99 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

99<br />

Button for temporary deactivation of rear<br />

door window switches and temporary<br />

override of window pinch protection<br />

Overriding the pinch protection<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure nothing obstructs the window<br />

when it is closed without pinch protection.<br />

If dirt, ice or similar create so much resistance<br />

that the pinch protection engages in<br />

the front electric windows (the window<br />

cannot be closed), the pinch protection can<br />

be temporarily disengaged and the window<br />

closed.<br />

1 Make sure the ignition is in position 3.<br />

2 Press and hold the button on the<br />

driver’s door while operating the window<br />

in question.<br />

3 Close the window in question.<br />

The pinch protection will be active the next<br />

time a window is operated.<br />

Calibration<br />

WARNING<br />

The pinch protection will not be engaged<br />

after a power break until the electric windows<br />

have been calibrated.<br />

The front electric windows should be calibrated<br />

if automatic closing does not work or<br />

if the battery has been disconnected. The<br />

pinch protection will not work if the windows<br />

are not calibrated 3.<br />

Calibration is performed as follows:<br />

1 Close the doors.<br />

2 The car must be running at idling speed.<br />

The battery charger must not be connected<br />

to the car’s battery during calibration.<br />

3 Open the window fully, the button must<br />

be kept depressed the whole time.<br />

4 Close the window fully, the button must<br />

be kept raised the whole time and for<br />

approx. 1 second after the window has<br />

closed.<br />

5 Open the window fully, the button must<br />

be kept depressed the whole time and<br />

for approx. 1 second after the window<br />

has fully opened.<br />

6 Close the window fully, and keep the<br />

button raised until the calibration is<br />

confirmed with a "chime".<br />

Repeat steps 3-6 for the windows which<br />

require calibration.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 100 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

100 Interior equipment<br />

Rear view mirrors<br />

Door mirrors<br />

To adjust<br />

The door mirrors are electrically adjustable<br />

and heated. The controls for adjusting the<br />

mirrors are on the driver’s door:<br />

1 Select a door mirror with the upper<br />

button.<br />

2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.<br />

The mirror glass can also be adjusted manually<br />

by gently pressing the glass in the<br />

desired direction.<br />

The mirror heating is turned on together with<br />

the rear window heating.<br />

If the car has an electrically adjustable<br />

driver’s seat with memory, the mirror<br />

settings are stored in the memory, see<br />

page 23.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> retraction<br />

The door mirrors are designed to fold back<br />

if knocked. The mirrors can also be<br />

retracted manually. This can be useful when<br />

parking in tight spaces, such as on the car<br />

deck of a ferry. Remember to return the door<br />

mirrors to their normal positions before<br />

driving off.<br />

1 Selection of mirror<br />

2 Touch pad for adjustment<br />

3 Electrical retraction<br />

4 Reversing position (electric)<br />

Electrical retraction 3<br />

Press the button under the touch pad.<br />

The mirrors can be retracted up to speeds<br />

of 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above<br />

20 mph (30 km/h), the mirrors will be folded<br />

out. The mirrors can also be operated with<br />

the remote control. Refer to Comfort<br />

closing 3 on page 103.<br />

Retracting a door mirror<br />

Reversing position 3<br />

The passenger-side mirror glass can be<br />

angled down to facilitate reversing. Press<br />

the button shown in the illustration. This<br />

is located under the touch pad. Return the<br />

mirror to its normal position by pressing the<br />

button again. The mirror will also return to its<br />

normal position automatically if you drive<br />

forward approximately 20 metres.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 101 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

101<br />

Mirror position lever<br />

1 Normal position<br />

2 Anti dazzle position<br />

Interior rear view mirror<br />

The interior rear view mirror is of the anti<br />

dazzle type and can be deflected with the<br />

lever on its underside. Certain variants have<br />

an auto dimming rear view mirror.<br />

The lever should be in the normal position<br />

when you adjust the mirror.<br />

Interior rear view mirror with auto<br />

dimming 3<br />

Press button 2 to activate auto dimming.<br />

The rear view mirror has two sensors: one<br />

forward-facing and one rear-facing sensor.<br />

The forward-facing sensor detects whether<br />

it is dark outside.<br />

The rear-facing sensor detects, for<br />

example, if the car following has not dipped<br />

its headlights. The rear view mirror is then<br />

darkened to prevent the strong light source<br />

from dazzling the driver. This darkening is<br />

stepless.<br />

The mirror returns to its normal state when<br />

the strong light source diminishes.<br />

The system is disengaged when reverse<br />

gear is selected.<br />

Towing a tall trailer can render the system<br />

inoperative, as light from the vehicle behind<br />

will not reach the rear-facing sensor.<br />

Auto dimming door mirrors 3<br />

If the car has auto dimming door mirrors,<br />

they are regulated by the same sensors<br />

as the rear view mirror.<br />

1 Forward-facing sensor<br />

2 Auto dimming ON/OFF<br />

3 Rear-facing sensor


460_OM_MY09.book Page 102 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

102 Interior equipment<br />

Sunroof 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when<br />

closing the electric sunroof. Risk of<br />

serious or fatal injuries!<br />

• Always remove the remote control<br />

from the ignition switch when you<br />

leave the car. This prevents the electric<br />

sunroof from being activated, such<br />

as by children playing.<br />

• The person operating the electric sunroof<br />

is responsible for ensuring that no<br />

one, especially a child, has their head,<br />

hands or fingers in the opening, before<br />

closing the sunroof.<br />

• Do not stick any part of the body or the<br />

head out through the sunroof while the<br />

car is moving.<br />

The sunroof is operated by the control in the<br />

roof console. For the sunroof to work, the<br />

remote control must be in position 3 in the<br />

ignition switch.<br />

If the car is equipped with windows having<br />

the automatic closing function, the sunroof<br />

can be opened and closed, so long as the<br />

car is unlocked, until 20 minutes has passed<br />

since the remote control was removed from<br />

the ignition switch.<br />

Sunroof control<br />

1 <strong>Manual</strong>ly controlled opening<br />

2 Automatic opening<br />

3 <strong>Manual</strong>ly controlled closing<br />

To open<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>ly controlled opening<br />

Slide the control rearward to its first position.<br />

The sunroof will halt when you release the<br />

control. If you do not release the control, the<br />

sunroof will open to the comfort position. To<br />

open the sunroof further, release the control<br />

and then once again press it rearward.<br />

Automatic opening<br />

Slide the control rearward to the second<br />

position and release it. The sunroof will<br />

open to the comfort position. To open the<br />

sunroof further, slide the control rearward a<br />

second time.<br />

4 Automatic closing<br />

5 Ventilation position<br />

Sunroof without automatic opening<br />

Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see<br />

illustration). The sunroof will stop when you<br />

release the control or once it is fully open.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 103 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

103<br />

To close<br />

WARNING<br />

Exercise great care when closing the sunroof<br />

to ensure that nothing gets trapped.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>ly controlled closing<br />

Slide the control forward to its first position.<br />

The sunroof will halt when you release the<br />

control.<br />

Automatic closing 3<br />

Slide the control forward to its second position<br />

and release it. The sunroof will close<br />

fully.<br />

The sunroof pinch protection halts closing<br />

and opens the sunroof slightly if something<br />

obstructs closing.<br />

Sunroof without automatic closing 3<br />

Slide the control forward to position 3 (see<br />

illustration). The sunroof will stop when you<br />

release the control or once it is fully closed.<br />

Ventilation position (rear edge of<br />

sunroof open)<br />

• To open – press the control up.<br />

• To close – slide the control forward to the<br />

second position.<br />

It is also possible to select the ventilation<br />

position when the sunroof is open by<br />

pressing in the control. The sunroof will then<br />

close automatically. Press the control once<br />

more to open the sunroof to its ventilation<br />

position.<br />

If you wish to open the sunroof fully from the<br />

ventilation position, you must first close it<br />

(slide the control forward). You can then<br />

slide the control rearward to open the sunroof.<br />

The sunroof incorporates an interior,<br />

manual, sliding sun blind.<br />

Sunroof without automatic closing 3<br />

• To open – press the control up.<br />

• To close – slide the control forward to<br />

position 3.<br />

Comfort opening 3<br />

Comfort opening is the remote opening of<br />

windows and the sunroof 3.<br />

Press and hold the unlocking button on the<br />

remote control until the windows and<br />

sunroof 3 start to open (approx. 2 s).<br />

If the sunroof is in the ventilation position, it<br />

will not open.<br />

Comfort closing 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure no one is so close to the car<br />

that they can be injured if comfort closing<br />

is activated.<br />

Comfort closing of the front windows means<br />

that open windows and the sunroof 3 are<br />

closed and the electrically retractable door<br />

mirrors 3 are retracted.<br />

Press and hold the locking button on the<br />

remote control until the windows are<br />

closed and door mirrors retracted (takes<br />

roughly 2 s). The doors must be shut.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 104 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

104 Interior equipment<br />

Pinch protection 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure nothing obstructs the sunroof<br />

when it is closed without pinch protection.<br />

The sunroof is equipped with pinch protection.<br />

This is activated if something gets<br />

trapped when the sunroof is being closed.<br />

The sunroof will stop and open slightly.<br />

Overriding the pinch protection<br />

If dirt, ice or similar create so much resistance<br />

that the pinch protection cuts in (sunroof<br />

cannot be closed), the pinch protection<br />

can be temporarily disengaged.<br />

1 Make sure the ignition is in position 3.<br />

2 Press and hold the button on the<br />

driver’s door while operating the window<br />

in question.<br />

3 Close the sunroof with the button on the<br />

roof console.<br />

The pinch protection will be operative the<br />

next time the sunroof is operated.<br />

Button for overriding the sunroof pinch<br />

protection<br />

Emergency operation of the<br />

sunroof<br />

In an emergency, such as if there is an electrical<br />

failure, the sunroof can be operated<br />

with a screwdriver.<br />

Remove the lens from the roof console. Use<br />

a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot<br />

in the centre of the motor shaft and turn the<br />

screwdriver.<br />

Turn clockwise – closes the sunroof from its<br />

ventilation position.<br />

Turn anticlockwise – closes the sunroof<br />

from its open position.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 105 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

105<br />

1 Interior lighting always off<br />

2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors<br />

3 Interior lighting on continuously<br />

Interior lighting<br />

The interior lighting consists of one front and<br />

one rear roof light, footwell lighting, and<br />

courtesy lights in the doors (certain variants<br />

only). The light switch for the interior lighting<br />

is located on the roof console by the rear<br />

view mirror.<br />

When the switch is in the mid-position (dooractivated),<br />

the interior lighting will come on:<br />

• when the car is unlocked<br />

• when any door is opened<br />

• when the remote control is removed from<br />

the ignition switch.<br />

The lighting goes out:<br />

• when the car is locked<br />

• when the ignition is turned on<br />

• approx. 20 seconds after closing all<br />

doors.<br />

The lights are dimmed out gradually.<br />

Rear lighting<br />

1 Reading lights<br />

2 Roof light<br />

If a door is left open, the light switch is in<br />

position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the<br />

interior lighting will be switched off automatically<br />

after 20 minutes to save the battery.<br />

The glove compartment lighting comes on<br />

when the compartment is opened and goes<br />

out when it is closed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 106 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

106 Interior equipment<br />

Can holder 3<br />

Sun visor with vanity mirror<br />

Sun visor<br />

An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on<br />

the inside of the sun visors. The lighting<br />

comes on when the cover is raised and goes<br />

out when it is closed.<br />

Luggage compartment lighting<br />

See page 116.<br />

Floor mats<br />

WARNING<br />

Secure the loose floor mats into the floor,<br />

otherwise they could slide forward. This is<br />

particularly important on the driver’s side<br />

as the mat could otherwise slide under<br />

the pedals and interfere with driving.<br />

Press the loose mat down over the two floor<br />

brackets. Then check that the mat is firmly<br />

secured.<br />

WARNING<br />

• The can holder should not be used to<br />

hold cups made of china or glass as<br />

these can cause personal injury in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles<br />

or aluminium cans.<br />

• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot<br />

drinks.<br />

• The driver should not use the can<br />

holder when driving.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 107 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Can holder between the front seats Can holder in rear seat cushion 3<br />

Interior equipment<br />

Ashtrays 3<br />

107<br />

Open the rear ashtray by gently pulling its<br />

upper edge obliquely downwards. Remove<br />

the ashtray by opening it and then lifting it<br />

straight up. Refit the ashtray by sliding<br />

straight in.<br />

You can use the electrical socket 3 in the<br />

storage compartment under the front seat<br />

armrest to charge a mobile phone, for<br />

example. There is a recess on each side of<br />

the compartment which will accept a lead so<br />

that you can close the lid without damaging<br />

the charger lead.<br />

WARNING<br />

The maximum output of the cigarette<br />

lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating<br />

of the socket in the compartment between<br />

the seats is the same. Overloading can<br />

result in melting or even fire.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 108 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

108 Interior equipment<br />

Storage compartments<br />

WARNING<br />

The glove compartment must be closed<br />

while travelling. This particularly applies if<br />

the car has a passenger airbag. An open<br />

glove compartment door could cause personal<br />

injury in the event of a collision.<br />

Front ashtray 3 Rear ashtray 3<br />

Storage compartments are also available in<br />

the doors. Cars equipped with the Bose ®<br />

Centerpoint ® Surround Sound System have<br />

no compartments in the rear doors.<br />

Storage compartment between front<br />

seats


460_OM_MY09.book Page 109 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

109<br />

Open the glove compartment with the<br />

button on the left of the moulding.<br />

Sliding cover in glove compartment to<br />

admit cold air 3. This allows the storage<br />

of chocolate or the like in hot weather.<br />

Storage pocket on front edge of seat 3.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 110 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

110 Interior equipment<br />

Luggage compartment<br />

Folding down the rear seat backrest, Sedan<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never driver the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into<br />

position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the<br />

event of heavy braking or a collision.<br />

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During<br />

sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and luggage<br />

compartments can climb to 70-80 °C. Small children are very<br />

susceptible to heat stroke.<br />

• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.<br />

• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always<br />

a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing<br />

injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a collision,<br />

see also page 166.<br />

• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is<br />

locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since otherwise<br />

objects in the luggage compartment could force their way<br />

into the cabin during heavy breaking or a collision.<br />

• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to<br />

a suitable height before riding in the car.<br />

• Only ride in the rear seat if the head restraints are adjusted to<br />

a suitable height in the occupied seats.<br />

• The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot<br />

during driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading<br />

the car so that children, for example, do not burn themselves.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 111 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

111<br />

For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the<br />

wide part can be folded down separately.<br />

Next to the hinges in the luggage compartment are handles for<br />

unlocking the rear seat backrests.<br />

It is easiest to fold down the rear seat backrests if the front seats are<br />

slid forward.<br />

1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

2 Fold the backrest forward.<br />

Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make<br />

sure that it locks properly in place and that the seat belt does not<br />

get caught.<br />

If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the following<br />

message is displayed on the DIC (equivalent message for<br />

right-hand backrest):<br />

Rear left seat<br />

backrest unlocked.<br />

Emergency opening the narrow section of the<br />

backrest, Sedan, see page 113<br />

Load-through hatch, Sedan<br />

A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to<br />

enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.<br />

Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and<br />

apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off if<br />

a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.<br />

• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.<br />

There is a lock on the rear side of the hatch. Turn this to lock or<br />

unlock the hatch.<br />

To lock: open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The<br />

hatch is now locked.<br />

To unlock: fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock<br />

the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the luggage<br />

compartment.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 112 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

112 Interior equipment<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always secure the load firmly, for<br />

example using the middle seat belt.<br />

This reduces the danger of personal<br />

injury resulting from the displacement<br />

of the load on hard braking or in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the<br />

car, as this will alter its handling characteristics,<br />

see page 236.<br />

Luggage compartment lighting<br />

The luggage compartment lighting comes<br />

on when the compartment is opened and<br />

goes out when it is closed.<br />

If the boot lid is left open, the lighting will be<br />

switched off automatically after 20 minutes<br />

to prevent the battery from running flat.<br />

Lashing eyes in luggage compartment<br />

Lashing eyes, Sedan<br />

There are lashing eyes in the luggage compartment<br />

that should be used to secure<br />

loads. In general, loads should be placed as<br />

far forward and as low down as possible in<br />

the luggage compartment.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 113 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Emergency opening the narrow<br />

section of the backrest, Sedan<br />

The narrow section of the backrest can be<br />

opened in an emergency if the car is without<br />

electricity (not possible to open boot lid) and<br />

you need to access the luggage compartment<br />

for the warning triangle, for example.<br />

• Remove the cover and press the yellow<br />

lever forward.<br />

Tools and spare wheel,<br />

see page 216<br />

Cover over emergency opening lever, on<br />

parcel shelf<br />

Interior equipment<br />

Securing loads<br />

WARNING<br />

113<br />

• Put heavy loads as low down and as<br />

far forward as possible in the luggage<br />

compartment, i.e. against the back of<br />

the rear seat.<br />

• Always lash down the load so that it<br />

cannot be thrown forward during<br />

heavy braking or in the event of a collision.<br />

• Unsecured and heavy loads can raise<br />

the risk of injury during hard braking,<br />

sudden avoidance manoeuvres or a<br />

collision.<br />

• Use the lashing eyes and suitable<br />

anchorage straps 3 for optimum<br />

securing of loads.<br />

• Load the lashing eyes evenly. Never<br />

attach more than one strap to each<br />

eye.<br />

• Cover sharp edges to prevent damage<br />

to the anchorage straps.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 114 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

114 Interior equipment<br />

• If possible, avoid having the rear seat<br />

folded down when driving with a heavy<br />

load, because the anchoring possibilities<br />

are restricted when the rear seat<br />

is in this position. The rear seat must<br />

be in the upright position to protect<br />

against load displacement in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Improve protection by fastening the<br />

outer seat belts. Check that the red<br />

indicator at each opening handle is not<br />

visible. If the red indicator is visible,<br />

the backrest is not locked!<br />

• Match your speed and driving style to<br />

how the car is loaded. The handling<br />

characteristics of the car can be<br />

affected since a load in the luggage<br />

compartment will alter the car’s centre<br />

of gravity.<br />

• An object weighing 25 kg corresponds<br />

to a weight of 1,000 kg in a front-end<br />

collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).<br />

Cargo net 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the<br />

elastic breaks this may cause personal<br />

injury. Do not use a cargo net<br />

that shows signs of wear.<br />

• Never use an elastic net in the luggage<br />

compartment when the rear seat is<br />

folded down. These nets are only<br />

intended to keep light objects tidy, not<br />

for the anchoring of loads.<br />

• Secure the load in the luggage compartment<br />

firmly. Using a cargo net is<br />

not considered as load securing.<br />

• The only purpose of a cargo net is to<br />

prevent light objects from being<br />

thrown forward into the cabin during<br />

heavy breaking.<br />

• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and<br />

load) so that the gross vehicle weight<br />

and the axle load are not exceeded,<br />

see page 236.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 115 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

115<br />

Tipping the rear seat down, Wagon<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never driver the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into<br />

position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the<br />

event of heavy braking or a collision.<br />

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During<br />

sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and luggage<br />

compartments can climb to 70–80°C. Small children are very<br />

susceptible to heat stroke.<br />

• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.<br />

• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is<br />

locked correctly. This is imperative since otherwise objects in<br />

the luggage compartment could force their way into the cabin<br />

during heavy breaking or a collision.<br />

• Only ride in the rear seat if the head restraints are adjusted to<br />

a suitable height in the occupied seats.<br />

• The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot<br />

during driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading<br />

the car so that children, for example, do not burn themselves.<br />

For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the<br />

wide part can be tipped down separately.<br />

The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and the<br />

rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.<br />

1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle forward.<br />

An unlocked backrest has a red indicator by the handle.<br />

2 Fold the backrest forward<br />

When returning the backrest to its upright position, make sure that<br />

it locks properly in place. The red indicator by the handle must not<br />

be visible. Also make sure that the seat belt does not get caught.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 116 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

116 Interior equipment<br />

WARNING<br />

• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place smaller and lighter bags<br />

on top.<br />

• Never overload a cargo net. If the elastic breaks this may<br />

cause personal injury. Do not use a cargo net that shows signs<br />

of wear.<br />

• Secure heavy and bulky items using the lashing eyes provided<br />

in the luggage compartment. This will avert the danger<br />

of luggage flying around if the car should brake suddenly or<br />

be involved in a collision.<br />

• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down. Small items<br />

can also be thrown around inside the car and cause personal<br />

injury.<br />

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its<br />

handling characteristics (see page 236).<br />

Luggage compartment lighting<br />

On the two side trims is a light that is switched on and off when the<br />

luggage compartment is opened and closed.<br />

If the luggage compartment is left open, the lighting will be switched<br />

off automatically after 20 min. to prevent the battery from running<br />

flat.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 117 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

117<br />

Load-through hatch, Wagon<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle<br />

seat belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury resulting<br />

from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its<br />

handling characteristics (see page 236).<br />

A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to<br />

enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.<br />

Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and<br />

apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off if<br />

a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.<br />

• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 118 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

118 Interior equipment<br />

Lashing eyes in Wagon<br />

Lashing eyes, Wagon<br />

Lashing eyes for securing the load are provided<br />

in the luggage compartment. Place<br />

the load as far forward as possible.<br />

Driving with the bootlid open, see page 166.<br />

Load anchoring<br />

WARNING<br />

• Put heavy loads as low down and as<br />

far forward as possible in the luggage<br />

compartment, i.e. against the back of<br />

the rear seat.<br />

• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the<br />

elastic breaks this may cause personal<br />

injury. Do not use a cargo net<br />

that shows signs of wear.<br />

• Never stack loads so high that any<br />

part of the load lies above the edge of<br />

the backrest, if a load guard 3 is not<br />

being used.<br />

• Always lash down the load so that it<br />

cannot be thrown forward during<br />

heavy braking or in the event of a collision.<br />

• Unsecured and heavy loads can<br />

increase the risk of injury during hard<br />

braking, sudden avoidance manoeuvres<br />

and in the event of a collision.<br />

• For the best load anchoring, use the<br />

special lashing eyes and straps 3.<br />

• Load the lashing eyes evenly. Never<br />

attach more than one strap to each<br />

lashing eye.<br />

• Provide protection on sharp edges to<br />

prevent damage to the anchoring<br />

straps.<br />

• Never use the elastic floor net 3 and<br />

elastic side net 3 when the rear seat is<br />

folded down. These nets are only<br />

intended to keep light objects tidy, not<br />

for the anchoring of loads.<br />

• If possible, avoid having the rear seat<br />

folded down when driving with a heavy<br />

load because the anchoring possibilities<br />

are restricted when the rear seat<br />

is in this position. That the rear seat<br />

is in the upright position is a basic<br />

requirement for protection against<br />

load displacement in the event of a<br />

collision.<br />

• Improve the protection by fastening<br />

the outer seat belts. Check that the<br />

two red warning-indication flags are<br />

fully down. This shows that the backrests<br />

are locked.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 119 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

119<br />

WARNING<br />

• Match the speed and driving style<br />

according to how the car is loaded.<br />

The driving characteristics of the car<br />

can be affected because the centre of<br />

gravity is altered when there is a load<br />

in the luggage compartment.<br />

• An object weighting 55 lbs. (25 kg)<br />

corresponds to a weight of 2000 lbs.<br />

(1000 kg) in a head on collision at<br />

30 mph (50 km/h).<br />

• Adjust the car´s load (passengers and<br />

luggage) so that the gross vehicle<br />

weight or the axle weight are not<br />

exceeded, see page 236.<br />

Cargo net 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the<br />

elastic breaks this may cause personal<br />

injury. Do not use a cargo net<br />

that shows signs of wear.<br />

• Never use an elastic net in the luggage<br />

compartment when the rear seat is<br />

folded down. These nets are only<br />

intended to keep light objects tidy, not<br />

for the anchoring of loads.<br />

• Secure the load in the luggage compartment<br />

firmly. Using a cargo net is<br />

not considered as load securing.<br />

• The only purpose of a cargo net is to<br />

prevent light objects from being<br />

thrown forward into the cabin during<br />

heavy breaking.<br />

Cargo net, vertical, Wagon<br />

Fit the net behind the rear seat backrest.<br />

1 Remove the rear cover panels in the<br />

roof.<br />

2 Fit the net’s upper fasteners into the two<br />

rear attachment points in the roof.<br />

3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two<br />

anchorage eyes closest to the rear seat.<br />

Tension the straps.<br />

The cargo net can also be fitted behind the<br />

front seats when the whole rear seat is<br />

folded.<br />

1 Remove the front cover panels in the<br />

roof.<br />

2 Snap the net’s upper fasteners into the<br />

two front attachment points in the roof.<br />

3 Lengthen the straps with the enclosed<br />

extra straps. Secure the net’s hooks in<br />

the two outer eyes furthest back on the<br />

front seats’ rails down by the floor. To<br />

locate the eyes, see page 29. Tension<br />

the straps.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 120 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

120 Interior equipment<br />

Attaching the cargo net to the roof Cargo net fitted in front anchorage eye Storing the cargo net<br />

Storage<br />

When the cargo net is not in use it should be<br />

stored in the bag supplied. Position the bag<br />

on the floor in the luggage compartment,<br />

closest to the backrest and secure it in the<br />

front anchorage eyes using the Velcro fasteners.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 121 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Cargo net, floor mounted, Wagon<br />

1 Fold up the floor. Position the edges of<br />

the floor in the slots in the side pieces.<br />

2 Fit the bag/carrier on the lower floor and<br />

secure the net’s hooks in the folded-up<br />

floor.<br />

Interior equipment<br />

121<br />

Cargo net, floor mounted, Wagon<br />

1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber<br />

bands are not twisted<br />

2 Lower anchorage point<br />

Cargo net, floor mounted, Wagon with<br />

subwoofer<br />

1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber<br />

bands are not twisted<br />

2 Lower anchorage point


460_OM_MY09.book Page 122 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

122 Interior equipment<br />

Cargo guard 3, Wagon<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not place any objects on the extended<br />

cargo guard. It is designed to shield<br />

against view and not for storage.<br />

To fit<br />

1 1 Hold the cartridge so that the extendible<br />

part faces backward.<br />

2 Position the cartridge over the pin (1) on<br />

the left and right-hand sides. Press the<br />

cartridge down and rotate it slightly forward<br />

until a click is heard.<br />

3 Check the fitting by pulling the cartridge<br />

up, it should now be fitted firmly.<br />

WARNING<br />

A cassette that is incorrectly fitted can<br />

detach and cause personal injury in the<br />

event of a collision, heavy breaking or<br />

similar.<br />

Fitting the cargo guard<br />

1 Pin on which the cargo guard is fitted<br />

2 Handle for removing the cargo guard<br />

To remove<br />

1 Retract the cargo guard into the cartridge.<br />

2 Pull the handle (2) back and lift up the<br />

cartridge. Repeat this on the other side.<br />

Opening the cargo guard<br />

Opening the cargo guard<br />

The cargo guard can be opened halfway in<br />

order to facilitate loading objects into the<br />

luggage compartment (and to avoid<br />

stretching in over the luggage compartment<br />

to reach the cargo guard).<br />

1 Open the tailgate.<br />

2 Press the rear lip of the cargo guard<br />

down, e.g. with an elbow. The cargo<br />

guard now opens halfway so that<br />

objects can be more easily loaded into<br />

the luggage compartment.<br />

3 Pull the cargo guard down to the lower<br />

position.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 123 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

123<br />

Starting and driving<br />

Ignition switch ________ 124<br />

Steering wheel lock____ 126<br />

Starting the engine ____ 126<br />

Important considerations<br />

for driving __________ 129<br />

Refuelling____________ 133<br />

Running-in ___________ 137<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox _______ 137<br />

Automatic<br />

transmission 3 ______ 138<br />

Cruise Control 3 ______ 144<br />

Braking______________ 146<br />

All-wheel drive (AWD) 3 148<br />

Traction Control System<br />

(TCS) ______________ 148<br />

StabiliTrak ® 3_________ 150<br />

Handbrake ___________ 152<br />

Parking ______________ 153<br />

Parking aid system 3 ___ 155<br />

Economical motoring ___ 158<br />

Driving in cold climates _ 160<br />

Driving in hot climates __ 162<br />

Towing a caravan or<br />

trailer 3 _____________ 163<br />

Driving with a roof load _ 166<br />

Driving with a load _____ 166<br />

Driving with the luggage<br />

compartment open____ 166<br />

Driving through deep<br />

water _______________ 166<br />

Towing _______________ 167<br />

Jump starting _________ 170<br />

Before long journeys ___ 172<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 124 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

124 Starting and driving<br />

Ignition switch<br />

In cars with automatic transmission, the<br />

remote control can only be removed when<br />

the selector lever is in position P.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always remove the remote control<br />

before leaving children unattended in<br />

the car.<br />

• Apply the handbrake before removing<br />

the remote control.<br />

• Never remove the remote control<br />

while the car is moving. This will activate<br />

the steering wheel lock and make<br />

it impossible to steer the car.<br />

To allow the various systems in the car time<br />

to register that the remote control has been<br />

inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn<br />

the remote control for roughly 0.5 of a<br />

second.<br />

Position 1<br />

The position lights, hazard warning lights<br />

and interior lighting can be turned on.<br />

Cars with automatic transmission<br />

Set the selector lever to position P.<br />

The selector lever is locked in position. This<br />

is the only position in which the remote control<br />

can be removed.<br />

Cars with manual gearbox<br />

The remote control can be removed regardless<br />

of the gear lever position.<br />

Position 2<br />

Parts of the electrical system are operative.<br />

Do not leave the remote control in this<br />

position since this can drain the battery<br />

in a matter of hours.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If the remote control is turned from position<br />

3 to this position before the car is stationary,<br />

it may be impossible to turn it to<br />

position 1. If this is the case, turn the<br />

remote control to position 3 until the<br />

ABS light goes out, approx. 2 seconds.<br />

Then turn it back to this position.<br />

Cars with automatic transmission<br />

The selector lever is not blocked. See also<br />

page 138.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 125 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

125<br />

Position 3<br />

The entire electrical system is operative. Do<br />

not leave the remote control in this position<br />

when the engine is not running.<br />

When you turn the remote control to this<br />

position, some indicator and warning lights<br />

will come on in the main instrument panel.<br />

These should go out after about 3 seconds.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: The heater plug<br />

function is activated if coolant temperature<br />

is below +5 °C. Start the engine once<br />

the indicator light has extinguished.<br />

Position 4<br />

The starter motor cranks (automatic transmission:<br />

selector lever must be in P or N)<br />

when the key is turned to this position.<br />

When released, the key will spring back to<br />

position 3.<br />

The car has an electronic restart lock. If the<br />

engine fails to start, the remote control must<br />

first be turned back to a position<br />

between 2 and 1 before turning it back to<br />

the start position.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 126 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

126 Starting and driving<br />

Steering wheel lock<br />

The steering wheel lock is electronic and is<br />

engaged when the remote control is withdrawn<br />

from the ignition switch. When the<br />

remote control is inserted into the ignition<br />

switch, the steering wheel lock is disengaged.<br />

A click will be heard when the<br />

steering wheel lock engages or disengages.<br />

If the car is parked with one front wheel<br />

touching the kerb, for example, you may<br />

need to turn the steering wheel slightly<br />

when you insert the remote control to allow<br />

the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do<br />

not succeed on first attempt you must<br />

remove the remote control before trying<br />

again. Turn the steering wheel and insert<br />

the remote control into the ignition switch.<br />

If the steering wheel lock does not disengage<br />

it will not be possible to turn the remote<br />

control in the ignition switch.<br />

the following message then appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Pull out key, turn<br />

steering wheel. Restart.<br />

If there is a fault that may affect the function<br />

of the steering wheel lock, the following<br />

message will be displayed on the DIC:<br />

Steering lock malfunc.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

If the steering wheel lock malfunctions while<br />

the remote control is in the ignition switch,<br />

the lock may not engage when the remote<br />

control is removed or it may prevent the car<br />

from being restarted once the engine has<br />

been switched off.<br />

If you have to leave the car, lock the car by<br />

pressing down the lock buttons on the<br />

doors. Lock the front left door from outside<br />

with the traditional key, see page 49. The<br />

car is now locked. If the car has a car alarm,<br />

this will remain inactive.<br />

Starting the engine<br />

WARNING<br />

• When starting the engine:<br />

– Sit down in the driver’s seat.<br />

– Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the<br />

gear lever is not in the neutral position,<br />

the clutch pedal must be fully<br />

depressed or the car will jump forwards<br />

or backwards, which may<br />

cause an accident.<br />

– Never start the car from outside the<br />

vehicle, e.g. through a wound-down<br />

window. This could lead to serious<br />

personal injury.<br />

• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colourless,<br />

odourless, noxious gas. Be<br />

aware of the danger of CO - always<br />

open the garage doors before starting<br />

the engine in a garage.<br />

• There is also a danger of CO poisoning<br />

if the exhaust system is leaking.<br />

Air may enter the lubrication system in conjunction<br />

with an oil or oil filter change. This<br />

may also happen if the car is laid up for<br />

some time.<br />

This air can cause the hydraulic tappets to<br />

emit a ticking noise, which can persist for up<br />

to 15 minutes after starting. This is quite<br />

normal and does not indicate a malfunction.<br />

It is however advisable not to exceed<br />

3000 rpm before the noise has disappeared.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 127 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

127<br />

Starting the engine<br />

Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily<br />

before it has warmed up. Do not drive away<br />

before the warning and indicator lights have<br />

gone out.<br />

The engine has an automatic choke and<br />

should be started as follows:<br />

Cars with manual gearbox<br />

1 Make sure the handbrake is applied.<br />

2 Depress the clutch and brake pedals.<br />

Do not touch the accelerator.<br />

Note: Once the engine has started, the<br />

brake pedal will normally drop slightly.<br />

3 Start the engine. Allow the remote control<br />

to spring back once the engine has<br />

started and is running smoothly.<br />

Allow the engine to idle for about<br />

10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at<br />

least 3 minutes after starting.<br />

Cars with automatic transmission<br />

1 The selector lever must be in the P or<br />

N position.<br />

2 Depress the brake pedal.<br />

Note: Once the engine has started, the<br />

brake pedal will normally drop slightly.<br />

3 Start the engine. Allow the remote control<br />

to spring back once the engine has<br />

started and is running smoothly.<br />

Allow the engine to idle for about 10 seconds.<br />

Do not apply full throttle for at<br />

least 3 minutes after starting.<br />

Useful tips on starting<br />

Petrol engine<br />

If the engine has failed to start after several<br />

attempts in severe cold, proceed as follows:<br />

1 Turn the ignition witch to position 3 (it is<br />

vital that the ignition switch is turned to<br />

position 3 before the accelerator is<br />

depressed).<br />

2 Press the accelerator to the floor and run<br />

the starter motor for 5–10 seconds. This<br />

will prevent the engine from being<br />

flooded (fully depressed accelerator<br />

cuts off the fuel supply).<br />

3 Now start the engine in the normal way -<br />

do not touch the accelerator.<br />

If the engine stalls immediately after starting<br />

(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),<br />

do not touch the accelerator when restarting<br />

the engine.<br />

If the car has a fuel-driven parking heater 3,<br />

this will start automatically soon after the<br />

engine has been started if coolant temperature<br />

is below 84 °C. This helps the engine<br />

temperature and cabin temperature rise<br />

more quickly.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 128 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

128 Starting and driving<br />

Cars with diesel engine 3<br />

At very low temperatures, you may need to<br />

run the starter motor for up to 60 seconds.<br />

Allow the engine to idle for<br />

about 10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle<br />

for at least 2–3 minutes after starting.<br />

To facilitate starting when coolant temperature<br />

is low, and to reduce exhaust emissions,<br />

there is a preheater plug in every cylinder.<br />

The indicator light "Indicator, glow<br />

plug (cars with diesel engine)" comes on<br />

when the remote control is turned to<br />

position 3 if coolant temperature is<br />

below +5 °C, see page 67.<br />

How long the glow filament operates<br />

depends on the coolant temperature.<br />

At +4 °C it will be engaged for<br />

about 1 second, while at –20 °C it will be<br />

engaged for about 10 seconds.<br />

Starting in cold climates (diesel engines)<br />

If the car is to be used in a cold climate for<br />

an extended period of time, we recommend<br />

the use of an engine heater.<br />

At very low temperatures (below –25 °C),<br />

run the starter motor until the engine is running<br />

at about 1,000 rpm under its own<br />

power.<br />

Even if you detect the beginnings of ignition<br />

after only a few seconds, it may be necessary<br />

to run the starter motor a good deal<br />

longer to get the engine running by itself.<br />

You may need to run the starter motor for up<br />

to 60 seconds. Refer also to "Driving in cold<br />

climates" on page 160.<br />

Petrol engine designed for E85 3<br />

When the temperature is about 0 °C or<br />

lower<br />

• If possible, use the engine heater<br />

– When starting from cold between –10<br />

and –20 °C the engine heater should be<br />

engaged for about 1 hr. before starting.<br />

If the temperature is considerably lower<br />

than –20 °C then the engine heater<br />

should be engaged considerably longer<br />

before starting.<br />

– Using the engine heater at temperatures<br />

above –10 °C is good for the environment<br />

and for fuel consumption.<br />

• If the engine heater cannot be used<br />

– When the temperature is about –10 °C<br />

or lower then a greater proportion of<br />

petrol should be used to avoid the car<br />

being more difficult to start.<br />

Starting in hot weather<br />

• Start the engine in the normal way.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 129 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Important<br />

considerations for<br />

driving<br />

Cars with turbo petrol engine<br />

1 Starting and driving.<br />

• Do not use full throttle until the engine<br />

is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary<br />

wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge<br />

repeatedly enters the red zone, the<br />

engine may suddenly lose power due to<br />

the initiation of a monitoring system<br />

that limits the boost pressure. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop immediately.<br />

• Under certain barometric conditions<br />

(high outside temperature and/or high<br />

altitude) the needle may enter the first<br />

part of the red zone without necessarily<br />

indicating that a fault has arisen.<br />

• A protective function (interruption of the<br />

fuel supply) limits the engine speed.<br />

2 Stopping the engine.<br />

• Do not rev the engine immediately<br />

before switching it off - stop the engine<br />

when it is idling.<br />

3 Boost pressure regulation.<br />

• The system is optimised for RON 95,<br />

but for 2.8 V6 RON 98 is used. One of<br />

the advantages of boost pressure regulation<br />

is that the engine can also be<br />

run safely on petrol with a lower octane<br />

rating, although not lower than<br />

91 RON, without damaging the engine.<br />

However, engine performance will fall<br />

slightly and heavy loading and<br />

labouring should be avoided. For<br />

optimum performance, use the recommended<br />

grade of fuel.<br />

• The maximum boost pressure is regulated<br />

according to the tendency of the<br />

engine to knock. Short-lived knocking<br />

is perfectly normal. This can occur<br />

when the engine is running at about<br />

3000 rpm under a heavy load. The<br />

extent of this knocking will depend on<br />

the grade of fuel in the tank.<br />

• Isolated instances of knocking can<br />

occur with low-octane fuel. This controlled<br />

form of knocking, followed by a<br />

reduction in the boost pressure, is a<br />

sign that the control system is working<br />

normally, and is perfectly safe for the<br />

engine.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Starting and driving<br />

129<br />

• If the engine sounds strange there is a<br />

malfunction. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• The use of fuel with too low an octane<br />

rating can cause serious engine<br />

damage.<br />

Limited performance.<br />

The light 3 comes on in the event of an<br />

engine or gearbox fault (cars with automatic<br />

gearbox), which can cause driveability<br />

problems but does not affect exhaust emission.<br />

The car can still be driven but perhaps<br />

with limited performance.<br />

Contact a workshop when you find it suitable.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 130 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

130 Starting and driving<br />

Limp-home<br />

The engine management system has a<br />

diagnostic feature that checks a number of<br />

internal functions. If a fault is detected in the<br />

throttle valve, the engine management<br />

system will set the throttle system to the<br />

limp-home mode. This means:<br />

• idling control will be poor (uneven idling<br />

since regulated by ignition and fuel<br />

supply)<br />

• engine performance will be reduced<br />

• the cruise control will not function<br />

• the capacity of the A/C compressor will be<br />

limited.<br />

The "Engine malfunction (CHECK<br />

ENGINE)" indicator illuminates in the main<br />

instrument panel if the diagnostics function<br />

detects a fault in the engine management<br />

system. See page 63. The car should be<br />

checked by a workshop as soon as possible.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If "Engine malfunction (CHECK<br />

ENGINE)" starts to flash (indicating that<br />

the engine is seriously misfiring and there<br />

is a risk of catalytic converter damage)<br />

release the accelerator slightly. The<br />

warning light may then either go out or<br />

shine with a steady glow. If the light continues<br />

to flash despite easing off the<br />

accelerator, you may continue to drive the<br />

car. It is however recommended that you<br />

drive the car as gently as allowed by the<br />

current traffic situation. Have the car<br />

checked at a workshop as soon as possible.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Important information<br />

concerning petrol-engined cars<br />

The catalytic converter is an emission control<br />

device incorporated in the car’s exhaust<br />

system. It consists of a metal canister with a<br />

honeycomb insert, the cells of which have<br />

walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious<br />

metal alloy).<br />

NOTICE<br />

Use only unleaded petrol. Leaded petrol<br />

is detrimental to the catalyst and oxygen<br />

sensor and will seriously impair the<br />

function of the catalytic converter.<br />

To ensure that the catalytic converter continues<br />

to function properly, and also to avoid<br />

damage to the converter and its associated<br />

components, the following points must be<br />

observed:


460_OM_MY09.book Page 131 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

131<br />

• Have the car serviced regularly in accordance<br />

with the service programme.<br />

• Always be alert to any misfiring of the<br />

engine (not running on all cylinders) and<br />

any loss of power or performance. At the<br />

first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed<br />

and take the car to a workshop as soon as<br />

possible. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• If the engine fails to start (in severe cold or<br />

if the battery is flat), the car can be bump<br />

started (manual gearbox only) or started<br />

using jump leads to a donor battery. However,<br />

as soon as you have started the<br />

engine, it is important that it runs on all<br />

cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow it to idle for<br />

up to 5 minutes to give it time to settle and<br />

run smoothly. If, after this time, the engine<br />

still fails to run properly, switch off the<br />

engine to avoid serious damage to the<br />

catalytic converter. We recommend that<br />

you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop<br />

for advice.<br />

Engine management system with catalytic<br />

converter<br />

1 Engine control module<br />

2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)<br />

3 Catalytic converter<br />

• Never park the car in dry grass or on other<br />

combustible material. The catalytic converter<br />

gets very hot and could therefore<br />

start a fire.<br />

• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.<br />

• If you bump start the car when the engine<br />

is already at normal working temperature,<br />

the engine must start to run on all cylinders.<br />

Abort bump starting if the engine<br />

fails to start immediately.<br />

Failure to strictly follow these instructions<br />

can result in damage to the catalytic converter<br />

and associated components, and<br />

could represent a breach of the warranty<br />

conditions.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If the car runs out of petrol, air may be<br />

drawn in with the fuel, which, in turn, can<br />

cause the catalytic converter to be damaged<br />

by overheating.<br />

WARNING<br />

If the engine is being run with the car on a<br />

rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure<br />

adequate cooling, air must be blown into<br />

the engine compartment and under the<br />

car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air<br />

effect that would obtain at the corresponding<br />

road speed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 132 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

132 Starting and driving<br />

Important information<br />

concerning diesel-engined cars<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Only use diesel fuel. Diesel engines<br />

must be run on diesel fuel that fulfils<br />

the EN590 <strong>Europe</strong>an standard. Do not<br />

use RME fuel, sometimes also called<br />

rape diesel, as this fuel will damage<br />

components in the fuel system.<br />

• Petrol in the fuel damages the fuel<br />

system. Do not drive the car if petrol<br />

has been filled by mistake. The complete<br />

fuel system must be drained and<br />

flushed with diesel fuel.<br />

• Do not use additives.<br />

• Even if the car has a fuel filter with<br />

water trap, diesel fuel that may have<br />

high water content should be avoided.<br />

High sulphur content should also be<br />

avoided.<br />

The following applies to diesel<br />

cars with particle filter 3<br />

The particle filter is a component part of the<br />

exhaust system. There are small particles in<br />

diesel exhaust fumes which are trapped in<br />

the particle filter. The filter is regenerated<br />

(the particles are combusted) at regular<br />

intervals.<br />

Regeneration occurs automatically. The<br />

time between each regeneration is affected<br />

by the type of traffic the car is driven in.<br />

Motorway driving results in the longest intervals.<br />

A regeneration can take up<br />

to 8 minutes.<br />

Regeneration starts when certain conditions<br />

are met, e.g.: the engine must have<br />

been running for at least 5 minutes (in cold<br />

weather conditions, for up to 15 minutes),<br />

the speed must be at least 25 km/h.<br />

If the car is only driven shorter distances,<br />

regeneration will not start. To prevent this,<br />

it is recommended that you drive<br />

for 20 minutes on the motorway<br />

every 1000 km. Regeneration will then be<br />

carried out.<br />

When the filter is regenerated it may seem<br />

that the engine is temporarily weaker.<br />

During town driving for example, the engine<br />

may seem sluggish during acceleration<br />

which is preceded by engine braking. This<br />

is least noticeable during highway driving.<br />

If regeneration is not activated, the following<br />

message is shown on the DIC:<br />

Particulate filter full.<br />

See Owner´s manual.<br />

Drive on the main roads for at<br />

least 20 minutes, otherwise the Check<br />

Engine light will come on when the filter is<br />

full and the car will continue to run in Limphome<br />

mode (the car can be driven but with<br />

limited performance). The car must then be<br />

checked immediately by a workshop.<br />

A manual regeneration check can then be<br />

carried out. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• When regeneration is under way the<br />

temperature in the whole exhaust<br />

system rises. For this reason, never<br />

park in a way that inflammable material<br />

may come into contact with the<br />

exhaust system.<br />

• It is important that the exhaust system<br />

is in good condition. If the exhaust<br />

system leaks then hot exhaust gases<br />

may flow against the underside of the<br />

car and cause damage.<br />

• Use a genuine <strong>Cadillac</strong> exhaust<br />

system, which is designed to withstand<br />

the temperature increase that<br />

occurs during regeneration.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 133 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Refuelling<br />

WARNING<br />

Petrol fumes are highly explosive. Bear<br />

therefore in mind:<br />

• Never smoke while refuelling.<br />

• Never use petrol for any purpose<br />

other than as fuel for your car.<br />

• Petrol is extremely flammable and can<br />

cause severe burns. No naked flames<br />

near petrol.<br />

• Do not use a mobile phone at the<br />

same time as refuelling.<br />

• If the car has a fuel-driven heater, this<br />

must be turned off for refuelling.<br />

Only use fuel grades from a well-known oil<br />

company.<br />

All <strong>Cadillac</strong> petrol engines can be driven<br />

on petrol with an octane rating between<br />

91 RON and 98 RON (RON = Research<br />

Octane Number).<br />

The engine management system monitors<br />

the combustion and automatically adapts to<br />

the fuel used.<br />

Always use the correct grade of fuel:<br />

unleaded 91–98 RON.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come<br />

right up the filler pipe as room for<br />

expansion is needed for when the<br />

temperature rises.<br />

• The use of fuel with too low an octane<br />

rating can cause serious engine<br />

damage.<br />

Starting and driving<br />

133<br />

For optimum performance we recommend:<br />

• RON 95 for 4-cyl. petrol engines.<br />

• RON 98 for 2.8 V6.<br />

• E85 for cars adapted to run on E85<br />

E85 fuel must fulfil the CWA 15293 or<br />

SS 155480 standard.<br />

• Diesel fuel for diesel engines.<br />

Diesel engines must be run on diesel fuel<br />

that fulfils the EN590 <strong>Europe</strong>an standard.<br />

Sometimes, petrol can contain a number of<br />

additives containing oxygen. The most<br />

common of these are alcohol or some type<br />

of ether. The maximum oxygen level is<br />

restricted by national regulations.<br />

If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is<br />

used, the maximum levels approved by<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> are: 5% by volume of methanol;<br />

or 10% by volume of ethanol. The most<br />

common type of ether used is MTBE<br />

(methyl-tertiary-butyl-ether), of which fuel<br />

may contain a maximum of 15% by volume.<br />

The fuel filler cap is located in the right-hand<br />

rear wing.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 134 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

134 Starting and driving<br />

Cars adapted to run on E85<br />

(85% ethanol)<br />

The fuel tank holds 61 litres.<br />

If access to E85 is limited then fuel with a different<br />

proportion of ethanol or normal<br />

RON 95 can be used for refuelling. The<br />

engine’s control management system is<br />

adjusted automatically according to the<br />

amount of ethanol in the fuel.<br />

When the temperature is about –10 °C or<br />

lower a greater proportion of petrol should<br />

be used. E85 in combination with low temperatures<br />

could lead to the car being more<br />

difficult to start. A slightly higher proportion<br />

of petrol improves the cold start properties<br />

considerably.<br />

Drive the car for at least 5 minutes after<br />

refuelling. For example, this is important<br />

when refuelling with E85 after having driven<br />

on petrol or vice versa. Driving for at least<br />

5 minutes allows the engine’s management<br />

system to reset itself for the new fuel mixture.<br />

Drive calmly during this period.<br />

During the engine’s warm-up phase<br />

(below +50 °C) engine torque is limited<br />

when driving with a proportion of ethanol.<br />

Ethanol contains less energy per litre<br />

than petrol, which is why fuel consumption<br />

increases when driving on E85 compared<br />

with petrol. A consequence of this<br />

is that a tank of E85 covers fewer<br />

kilometres than a tank of petrol.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Certain additives in petrol could, in combination<br />

with ethanol, cause reduced<br />

driveability. For this reason, refuel with a<br />

full tank of petrol (RON 95) every<br />

10 000 km. Use up the majority of this<br />

before refuelling the car again.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If a reserve fuel can is kept in the car then<br />

it should be filled with petrol, RON 95.<br />

• The engine has higher torque and output<br />

the higher the proportion of E85 that is<br />

used.<br />

• A larger proportion of E85 results in a<br />

greater requirement for the use of an<br />

engine heater in cold weather.<br />

• When the engine is cold and the proportion<br />

of E85 in the fuel tank is large<br />

(above 50%) engine torque is limited in<br />

order to avoid misfiring. The risk of misfiring<br />

is greatest if the engine is subjected<br />

to a heavy load at the same time. Torque<br />

limitation is active when the ethanol content<br />

is above 50% and engine temperature<br />

is below 50 °C at the same time.<br />

• E85 should be treated with the same<br />

caution as petrol.<br />

• E85 contains a red colouring substance.<br />

This results in the engine oil becoming<br />

slightly red.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 135 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

135<br />

Filler cap removed for refuelling<br />

Filler cap<br />

To open: The fuel filler cap is threaded. Turn<br />

the cap slowly to the left (anticlockwise).<br />

Cars adapted to run on E85 (85% ethanol):<br />

Turn the fuel filler cap a quarter turn to the<br />

left.<br />

To close: Turn the fuel filler cap to the right<br />

(clockwise) until you hear three clicks.<br />

Cars adapted to run on E85 (85% ethanol):<br />

Turn the fuel filler cap to the right (clockwise)<br />

until you hear three clicks, about a<br />

quarter of a turn.<br />

Opening the fuel filler flap manually 3, see<br />

page 60.<br />

Refuelling<br />

WARNING<br />

If the tank starts to burn while you are<br />

refuelling, do not remove the pump<br />

nozzle. Cut the fuel supply. Inform the<br />

staff. Leave the area immediately.<br />

1 Switch off the engine.<br />

2 Open the filler cap.<br />

3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the<br />

flange on the filler pipe and let the first<br />

mark (a ring, a pimple or the first springcoil)<br />

rest on the flange. Do not withdraw<br />

the nozzle while filling is in progress.<br />

4 Cease refuelling when the pump cuts<br />

out for the first time.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right<br />

up the filler pipe as room for expansion is<br />

needed for when the temperature rises.<br />

The most effective way to prevent condensation<br />

forming in the tank (and thus avoid<br />

possible running problems) is to keep the<br />

tank well filled.<br />

Refer to page 160 for information regarding<br />

carburettor spirit.<br />

Cars with diesel engine 3<br />

Only use diesel fuel intended for vehicle<br />

use. Diesel engines must be run on diesel<br />

fuel that fulfils the EN590 <strong>Europe</strong>an<br />

standard. Never use domestic fuel oil,<br />

marine diesel fuel or similar. The diesel fuel<br />

must have a cetane rating of at least 45.<br />

Fuel additives (flow improvers) and suchlike<br />

agents must not be added to the diesel fuel.<br />

Also, do not refuel from a diesel pump<br />

intended for lorries. Such pumps have an<br />

unsuitably high delivery capacity, which<br />

would cause heavy foaming and cause the<br />

pump to cut out too early.<br />

Cease refuelling when the pump cuts out for<br />

the first time.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right<br />

up the filler pipe as room for expansion is<br />

needed for when the temperature rises.<br />

In low temperatures, a paraffin precipitate<br />

may form in the diesel fuel which can cause<br />

starting difficulties.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 136 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

136 Starting and driving<br />

Water in fuel 3<br />

The fuel passes through a filter on its way<br />

from the tank to the engine. The filter traps<br />

any water in the fuel. When there is an<br />

excessive amount of water in the filter, the<br />

following message appears in DIC:<br />

Water in fuel.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Contact a workshop to have the problem<br />

remedied. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

If you run out of fuel<br />

If your diesel-engined car runs out of fuel,<br />

proceed as follows:<br />

• Put in at least 5 litres of fuel. More is<br />

required if the car is on a tilt.<br />

• Start the engine as usual.<br />

• Do not touch the accelerator.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not run the starter motor for an unnecessarily<br />

long time if there is no fuel in the<br />

tank. This could otherwise damage the<br />

high-pressure pump.<br />

Filling a fuel tank<br />

WARNING<br />

Never fill a fuel can that is standing in the<br />

car. Static electricity from the can could<br />

ignite the petrol fumes. This can cause<br />

severe burns and damage to the car. To<br />

avoid this happening:<br />

• only use an approved fuel can<br />

• never fill the fuel can while it is<br />

standing in the car, in the luggage<br />

compartment or any other surface<br />

than the ground<br />

• make sure that the pump nozzle<br />

touches the can’s filler orifice before<br />

starting to fill it. Maintain contact<br />

throughout filling<br />

• do not smoke while filling.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 137 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Running-in<br />

Pistons, bores and bearings need time to<br />

bed in, to obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.<br />

If a new engine is driven too hard, this<br />

gradual process of bedding-in will not be<br />

possible and the life of the engine will be<br />

shortened.<br />

Cars with petrol engine: during the first<br />

2000 km do not exceed 5000 rpm.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: during the first<br />

5000 km do not exceed 4000 rpm.<br />

In addition, refrain from driving the car at full<br />

throttle, other than for brief instances,<br />

during the first 1800 miles (3000 km).<br />

Bedding-in of new brake lining<br />

The bedding-in period for new brake lining<br />

is about 150 km if the car is driven mainly in<br />

urban traffic or about 500 km for mainly<br />

motorway driving.<br />

To avoid premature wear and shortening<br />

the life of the pads, avoid heavy braking as<br />

much as possible during this period.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox<br />

When changing gear, fully depress the<br />

clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It<br />

is inadvisable to drive with your hand resting<br />

on the gear lever, as this can increase the<br />

wear on the gearbox.<br />

Before reverse gear (R) can be engaged,<br />

you must lift the ring underneath the gear<br />

knob.<br />

NOTICE<br />

When reverse gear is to be engaged,<br />

the car must be at a standstill with the<br />

accelerator fully released.<br />

Starting and driving<br />

Gear lever, manual gearbox<br />

137


460_OM_MY09.book Page 138 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

138 Starting and driving<br />

Automatic<br />

transmission 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Depress the brake pedal when shifting<br />

the selector lever from P or N.<br />

• The car must be at a standstill before<br />

P, R or N is selected. If the car is still<br />

moving when a drive position is subsequently<br />

selected, this could cause an<br />

accident or damage the automatic<br />

transmission.<br />

• Never park the car with the selector<br />

lever in a drive position, even if the<br />

handbrake is on.<br />

• If you wish to leave the car with the<br />

engine running, move the selector<br />

lever to the P position and apply the<br />

handbrake.<br />

The automatic transmission has an electronic<br />

control module. The control module<br />

receives information including accelerator<br />

position and road speed. Using this and<br />

other information, it controls the hydraulic<br />

pressure of the transmission to ensure that<br />

gear changing is as smooth as possible.<br />

Selector lever<br />

1 Position for manual gear selection<br />

The remote control can only be removed<br />

when the selector lever is in the P position.<br />

The engine can only be started when the<br />

selector lever is in the P or N position.<br />

When the car is stationary, the engine must<br />

be idling when you move the selector lever<br />

from one position to another. If not, the<br />

transmission could be damaged.<br />

NOTICE<br />

After selecting a drive position, always<br />

wait until the gear is engaged (the car<br />

begins to pull slightly) before pressing the<br />

accelerator.<br />

Indication of gear position on main<br />

instrument panel<br />

Park Brake Shift Lock<br />

The transmission has a security function<br />

known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move<br />

the gear selector out of the P or N position,<br />

the gear selector detent (catch) must be<br />

pressed in at the same time as the brake<br />

pedal is held depressed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 139 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

139<br />

Selector lever detent<br />

The detent button on the selector lever has<br />

to be pressed in before the lever can be<br />

moved between certain positions.<br />

The brake pedal must be depressed before<br />

shifting the selector lever from P or N.<br />

Adaptive gear change patterns<br />

The adaptive gear change pattern function<br />

adapts gear changing to the prevailing<br />

driving conditions. The transmission control<br />

module senses the engine load, vehicle<br />

speed and temperature of the transmission.<br />

A suitable gear change pattern is then<br />

selected automatically to avoid unnecessary<br />

gear changes and undesired increases<br />

in transmission temperature.<br />

Certain variants use a special change pattern<br />

for the first few minutes after a cold start<br />

so that the catalytic converter reaches its<br />

working temperature more quickly.<br />

Alternatives Sentronic and SPORT,<br />

see page 143 and page 144.<br />

Thermal transmission protection<br />

of the gearbox<br />

If the temperature of the transmission fluid<br />

exceeds 150 °C, engine torque will be<br />

limited to 200 Nm.<br />

the following message then appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Gearbox too hot. Make a<br />

safe stop. Open hood.<br />

If this message appears, stop the car as<br />

soon as it is safe to do so and allow the<br />

engine to idle until the message has gone<br />

out. The selector lever should be in<br />

position P.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 140 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

140 Starting and driving<br />

Lock-up<br />

The transmission’s torque converter has a<br />

so-called lock-up function. This means that<br />

in gear, the torque converter is locked in,<br />

which reduces engine speed and fuel consumption.<br />

Kick-down<br />

When the accelerator is pressed down fully,<br />

a down change is made to optimize<br />

acceleration, e.g. for overtaking.<br />

Following this, the next higher gear will be<br />

selected at the optimum engine speed or, if<br />

you ease off the accelerator, before<br />

reaching this.<br />

Driving with a heavy load on hilly<br />

roads<br />

The transmission fluid can overheat when<br />

the gearbox is strained, for example, when<br />

driving with a caravan on hilly roads. To<br />

avoid the transmission fluid overheating,<br />

always drive with the selector lever in the<br />

D position. The adaptive gear change patterns<br />

are then active.<br />

High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler<br />

can also cause the transmission fluid to<br />

overheat. Overheating reduces the service<br />

life of the fluid.<br />

WARNING<br />

Remember to use the braking effect of the<br />

engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you<br />

are descending long or steep hills to<br />

spare the brakes.<br />

Overheating can cause the brakes to<br />

fade!<br />

Towing<br />

Towing of cars with automatic transmission,<br />

see page 167.<br />

Descending hills<br />

If the speed of the car increases while<br />

descending a steep hill, despite the accelerator<br />

being released, the control module will<br />

change down. If you desire more powerful<br />

engine braking, manually select a lower<br />

gear, see page 143.<br />

Limp-home<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not tow a caravan or trailer if limphome<br />

mode is engaged.<br />

If the transmission malfunctions, the control<br />

module will activate limp-home mode.<br />

Driveability will be affected to varying<br />

degrees.<br />

the following message then appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Gearbox malfunction.<br />

Limited performance.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 141 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

141<br />

Cars with 5-speed transmission<br />

In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are<br />

available. Select 2nd gear when driving at<br />

low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.<br />

2nd gear must be selected manually. Select<br />

5th gear manually or move the selector<br />

lever to D, see page 143.<br />

Cars with 6-speed transmission 3<br />

• The car may seem totally powerless. If<br />

this is the case, have the car towed to a<br />

workshop to have the problem remedied.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• The car may seem to have greatly<br />

reduced power, but can be carefully<br />

driven to a workshop to have the problem<br />

remedied. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• Driveability may barely be affected.<br />

Regardless of how driveability is perceived,<br />

the car must be taken to a workshop to have<br />

the problem checked and remedied. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Park Brake Shift Lock<br />

The transmission has a security function<br />

known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move<br />

the gear selector out of the P or N position,<br />

the gear selector detent (catch) must be<br />

pressed in at the same time as the brake<br />

pedal is held depressed.<br />

Temporary override of this function<br />

An electrical fault can prevent the gear<br />

selector being moved out of the P position.<br />

If this is the case and the car must be<br />

moved, for example to tow it a short distance,<br />

follow the instructions below:<br />

1 Apply the handbrake.<br />

2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage<br />

compartment ahead of the selector<br />

lever.<br />

3 Under the floor of the storage compartment<br />

is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin<br />

tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and<br />

hold the plastic lever while moving the<br />

selector lever from P to N.<br />

4 Remove the tool.<br />

5 Release the handbrake if the car is to be<br />

moved immediately, otherwise it should<br />

remain on.<br />

Check fuse 6 in the engine bay electrical<br />

centre. If the fuse is whole the battery may<br />

be flat. We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop to have the<br />

problem checked and rectified.<br />

Temporary override of Park Brake Shift<br />

Lock


460_OM_MY09.book Page 142 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

142 Starting and driving<br />

Selector positions<br />

P<br />

The selector lever is locked and the transmission<br />

is mechanically blocked.<br />

The engine can be started.<br />

To move the selector out of the P position, depress<br />

the brake pedal and press in the detent (catch) on<br />

the selector lever.<br />

Only select the park position (P) when the car is<br />

stationary.<br />

R<br />

Only select the reverse position (R) when the car<br />

stationary. The detent release button must be<br />

pressed before the selector lever can be moved<br />

to R.<br />

Wait until reverse gear has engaged before<br />

touching the accelerator.<br />

N<br />

You must press the brake pedal to move the<br />

selector lever from the neutral position (N).<br />

In neutral, the transmission is disengaged from the<br />

engine. The engine can be started but make sure<br />

the handbrake is on to prevent unexpected movement.<br />

To prevent the engine and transmission becoming<br />

hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with<br />

the engine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.<br />

At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive<br />

position (D).<br />

D<br />

The drive position (D) is the normal one for forward<br />

motoring. The transmission shifts automatically<br />

between all gears, the timing of which depends on<br />

factors such as the current accelerator position<br />

and the speed of the car.<br />

Pause for a moment before applying the<br />

accelerator, to allow the gears to engage.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 143 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

143<br />

Sentronic, manual gear selection<br />

Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)<br />

(to the left position D) to select gear manually.<br />

Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever<br />

forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The<br />

selector lever will return to a position adjacent to<br />

the letter M after each gear change.<br />

An example of when you may wish to make<br />

manual gear changes is when overtaking, to<br />

enable you to remain in a low gear for an extended<br />

period of time.<br />

If the road surface is slippery, you may wish to pull<br />

off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheelspin.<br />

When descending steep hills you should select a<br />

low gear to increase the braking effect of the<br />

engine and thus spare the brakes.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gear selections are displayed on the main instrument<br />

panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.<br />

When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the<br />

D position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in<br />

accelerator position. The accelerator has a different feel.<br />

When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the<br />

transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low<br />

enough to avoid overrevving.<br />

Steering wheel controls for manual gear<br />

selection 3<br />

Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear<br />

selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually<br />

using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The<br />

steering wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in<br />

the M position.<br />

Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower<br />

gear by pressing the left-hand button.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 144 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

144 Starting and driving<br />

Error messages<br />

If a fault occurs in the system, a fault<br />

message is shown in DIC. We recommend<br />

contacting an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

Cruise Control 3<br />

(Cruise Control system)<br />

WARNING<br />

Do not use the cruise control system in<br />

wet or icy conditions, in dense traffic or on<br />

winding roads.<br />

Location of the SPORT button<br />

Sport mode 3<br />

Sport mode is selected using the SPORT<br />

button. Gear changes in the automatic<br />

gearbox occur at higher engine speed than<br />

the normal program. Up changes occur later<br />

and down changes occur earlier at the same<br />

accelerator pedal position.<br />

Sport mode will be deselected if:<br />

• The SPORT button is pressed.<br />

• The engine is switched off.<br />

For safety reasons (brake system function),<br />

the brakes must be applied once<br />

before the cruise control system can be<br />

activated.<br />

Otherwise, the following message appears<br />

in DIC when you try to activate the Cruise<br />

Control system:<br />

Tap brakes lightly<br />

before using cruise ctrl.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 145 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Cruise control switches<br />

The system has the following functions:<br />

1 ON: engaged<br />

2 OFF: disengaged<br />

3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases<br />

the set speed<br />

4 SET/–: sets the speed and decreases<br />

the set speed<br />

5 RESUME: re-engages the system at the<br />

set speed<br />

The indicator light in the main instrument<br />

panel comes on when the switch is slid<br />

to ON. If you switch off the engine while the<br />

cruise control is ON, the system will be ON<br />

the next time the engine is started.<br />

To set the speed<br />

1 Slide the switch to ON.<br />

2 Jog the control to SET/+ or SET/– when<br />

the car has reached the desired speed<br />

(above 15 mph (25 km/h)).<br />

To increase the preset speed<br />

You can increase the speed in any of the following<br />

ways:<br />

• Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the<br />

control to SET/+ or SET/–.<br />

• Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the<br />

speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise<br />

control already engaged).<br />

• Hold the control in the SET/+ position until<br />

the desired speed is reached (when<br />

cruise control already engaged).<br />

To reduce the preset speed<br />

You can reduce speed in any of the following<br />

ways:<br />

• Brake to the desired speed. Jog the control<br />

to SET/+ or SET/–.<br />

• Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the<br />

speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).<br />

• Hold the control in the SET/– position until<br />

the desired speed is reached.<br />

Starting and driving<br />

145<br />

Temporary increase in speed<br />

Accelerate, without shifting down (manual<br />

gearbox), to exceed the set speed such as<br />

for overtaking. When you release the accelerator,<br />

the car will return to the set speed.<br />

To disengage the system<br />

temporarily<br />

Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but<br />

only as far as to disengage the cruise control.<br />

Allow the switch to spring back.<br />

To re-engage the system<br />

Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will<br />

return to the previously set speed. Vehicle<br />

speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).<br />

To disengage the system<br />

The system will be disengaged:<br />

• When you depress the brake or clutch<br />

pedal (cars with manual gearbox).<br />

• When the switch is slid to To disengage<br />

the system temporarily.<br />

• When the switch is slid to OFF.<br />

• When the TCS/StabiliTrak ® regulates<br />

• When position N is selected (cars with<br />

automatic transmission).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 146 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

146 Starting and driving<br />

Braking<br />

It is good practice to try your brakes periodically<br />

while driving. This is particularly<br />

important when driving in heavy rain, on<br />

roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or<br />

in salty slush. In such conditions a slight<br />

delay in the braking effect may be noticed.<br />

To minimise this delay, dry the brakes by<br />

applying them lightly now and again. This<br />

should also be done after the car has been<br />

washed, and in extremely damp weather.<br />

To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,<br />

such as when negotiating long descents<br />

with a drop of several hundred metres,<br />

select a low gear to utilise the braking effect<br />

of the engine. If the car has automatic transmission,<br />

select 1st or 2nd gear.<br />

You can help to prolong the life of the brakes<br />

by thinking ahead and braking harder over<br />

short periods, rather than braking more<br />

moderately over long stretches.<br />

WARNING<br />

The brake pressure required when the<br />

engine is off, such as when the car is on<br />

tow, is roughly four times the normal<br />

pedal force required. The pedal will feel<br />

hard and unresponsive. The steering will<br />

also be very heavy.<br />

We advise against using wheels with<br />

large ventilation slots in winter, as the<br />

brake components are then more<br />

exposed to slush, road salt and grit.<br />

Overheating can cause the brakes to<br />

fade!<br />

ABS brakes<br />

WARNING<br />

No ABS system can set aside the laws of<br />

physics. The additional safety afforded by<br />

the system is not designed to allow<br />

drivers to drive faster but to make normal<br />

driving safer.<br />

In order to achieve as short a stopping<br />

distance as possible with better handling<br />

on dry, wet and slippery road surfaces,<br />

depress the brake pedal with full force,<br />

declutch and if necessary steer to<br />

safety.<br />

The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modulates<br />

the brake pressure to each wheel. The<br />

pressure is automatically reduced just<br />

before the wheel locks up and then<br />

increases again to the point at which the<br />

wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sensors<br />

send information to the brake system’s<br />

electronic control module for every decimetre<br />

that the car rolls. This information is<br />

processed continuously to ensure that the<br />

adjustment of the brake pressure will be as<br />

exact as possible. Adjustment takes place<br />

up to 12 times per second.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 147 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

147<br />

The brake system provides Electronic<br />

Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distributes<br />

the brake pressure between the front<br />

and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve<br />

optimum braking performance irrespective<br />

of the car’s speed or load.<br />

The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function<br />

which will switch on the ABS warning light if<br />

a fault is detected in the system, see<br />

page 62.<br />

the following message then appears on the<br />

DIC:<br />

Antilock brake malfunc.<br />

Contact service.<br />

The ABS system will not reduce the braking<br />

distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,<br />

because the wheels cannot lock up,<br />

steering control is retained.<br />

When the ABS system operates you will feel<br />

the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking<br />

noise, both of which are perfectly normal.<br />

Apply the brake pedal with full force (you<br />

cannot press too hard), declutch and if necessary<br />

steer to safety.<br />

Braking with ABS brakes.<br />

Indication that the system is operating:<br />

pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise<br />

Do not release the brake pedal before the<br />

car has come to a halt or the danger is<br />

past!<br />

The above is critical.<br />

Braking with ABS – evasive steering<br />

If the road is slippery, the ABS system will<br />

operate even when only light pressure is<br />

applied to the brake pedal. This means that<br />

the driver can brake to test the condition of<br />

the road and adapt their driving accordingly.<br />

It is well worth practising the use of ABS<br />

brakes on a skid pan or other suitable<br />

facility.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 148 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

148 Starting and driving<br />

All-wheel drive (AWD) 3<br />

Essentially, the system consists of a PTU<br />

(Power Take off Unit), propeller shaft, RDM<br />

(Rear Drive Module which contains an electronically<br />

controlled plate clutch, final drive<br />

gear and differential) and driveshafts. This<br />

system enhances driving characteristics<br />

and stability. The system is always active<br />

and cannot be deactivated. It works<br />

together with the ESP system and the<br />

engine and transmission control modules.<br />

When driving at a constant speed, approx.<br />

95% of the torque is distributed to the front<br />

wheels and approx. 5% to the rear wheels.<br />

The torque is distributed steplessly and<br />

instantaneously between the front and rear<br />

wheels, depending on the driving conditions.<br />

If the car is fitted with eLSD (electronically<br />

controlled plate clutch between the<br />

rear wheels), the torque can also be distributed<br />

individually to the relevant rear wheel.<br />

For optimum system function, the car’s<br />

tyres should not have varying degrees of<br />

wear.<br />

When the AWD system requires service,<br />

the following message is shown on the DIC:<br />

Service XWD.<br />

When the service message is displayed,<br />

the AWD system may have limited functionality<br />

(or be completely disabled in<br />

some cases, i.e. the car switches to<br />

front-wheel drive). Contact a workshop<br />

for information. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Traction Control<br />

System (TCS)<br />

Anti-spin system<br />

WARNING<br />

The TCS system improves stability and<br />

driveability during normal driving, but it<br />

must not be regarded as an opportunity to<br />

increase the speed. The same precautions<br />

as normal for safe cornering and<br />

driving on slippery roads must be<br />

adopted.<br />

How the system works<br />

The Traction Control System (TCS) is<br />

designed to reduce wheelspin and so to<br />

give the car the best possible tractive force,<br />

together with enhanced driveability and<br />

greater stability.<br />

The TCS system uses information from the<br />

ABS system’s wheel speed sensors to<br />

determine whether any wheel is spinning. If<br />

any wheel is spinning, this is reduced on allwheel<br />

drive cars initially by changing the<br />

torque distribution, secondly by reducing<br />

the engine torque, and thirdly with the aid of<br />

the wheel brakes. On front-wheel drive cars,<br />

wheelspin is reduced initially by reducing<br />

the engine torque, and secondly with the aid<br />

of the wheel brakes.<br />

The advantages of the TCS system are<br />

most apparent when road surface friction is


460_OM_MY09.book Page 149 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

149<br />

so low that a lot of wheelspin can occur rapidly:<br />

• When the car is pulling away or accelerating<br />

with the front wheels on different<br />

surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),<br />

the TCS functions like an electronic differential<br />

lock, making sure that both wheels<br />

rotate at the same speed. The system<br />

also works during reversing.<br />

• When cornering, if the inside front wheel<br />

rotates faster than the other wheels.<br />

TCS indicator<br />

When the remote control is turned to position<br />

3, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds<br />

while the system performs self-diagnosis.<br />

The indicator in the main instrument<br />

panel illuminates when TCS regulates, that<br />

is when one of the wheels has lost its grip.<br />

The fact that the TCS is operative indicates<br />

that the limit for grip has been exceeded and<br />

that the driver must exercise greater care.<br />

TCS OFF<br />

in the main instrument panel illuminates<br />

when<br />

• the system has been switched off manually,<br />

speed must be below 60 km/h.<br />

• there is a fault in the ABS system.<br />

• there is a fault in the TCS system, and<br />

at the same time the following message<br />

is shown on the DIC:<br />

Traction control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Turning the TCS off temporarily<br />

The TCS is switched on automatically when<br />

the engine is started.<br />

It may be necessary to switch off the system<br />

if the car has become bogged down, for<br />

instance.<br />

If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will<br />

be switched off automatically.<br />

The cruise control system (if active) will<br />

automatically be disengaged if the TCS is<br />

operative.<br />

Disengage the system in Settings.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select TCS.<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5Select ON or OFF.<br />

End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Go back/undo using the CLR button.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 150 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

150 Starting and driving<br />

StabiliTrak ® 3<br />

Anti-skid system<br />

WARNING<br />

When driving normally, the StabiliTrak ®<br />

system improves the car’s stability. This<br />

must not, however, be regarded as a<br />

reason to maintain higher speeds. Maintain<br />

the same precautions as normal to<br />

ensure safe cornering and safe driving on<br />

slippery roads.<br />

StabiliTrak uses functions from the Anti-lock<br />

Braking System (ABS) and Traction Control<br />

System (TCS) to help the driver stabilise the<br />

car in unexpected driving situations that<br />

would otherwise be difficult to manoeuvre.<br />

The illustration shows how the system<br />

brakes one or more wheels (and with varying<br />

braking force for each wheel) in order<br />

to increase the car’s chances of following<br />

the direction in which the driver wants to<br />

drive.<br />

How the StabiliTrak ® system<br />

works<br />

StabiliTrak ® can help to prevent the car from<br />

skidding by braking one or more wheels<br />

regardless of whether the driver is<br />

depressing the brake pedal. Engine output<br />

is also choked to reduce any drive wheel<br />

spin. The car has sensors that measure<br />

wheel speed, yaw angle rate, lateral acceleration,<br />

steering wheel angle and brake<br />

pressure. Signals from these sensors are<br />

used to calculate the course of the vehicle,<br />

the driver’s intentions and whether the<br />

StabiliTrak ® system should be deployed.<br />

The course of the vehicle is compared to the<br />

course selected by the driver via the<br />

steering wheel. If these values do not<br />

match, the StabiliTrak ® function comes into<br />

action.<br />

StabiliTrak ® gives the driver a greater<br />

chance of maintaining control of the car in a<br />

critical situation.<br />

StabiliTrak ® indicator light<br />

When the remote control is turned to position<br />

3, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds<br />

while the system performs self-diagnosis.<br />

in the main instrument panel illuminates<br />

for a brief period when the<br />

StabiliTrak ® system regulates.<br />

If the StabiliTrak ® system comes into action,<br />

The friction limit for the tyre/road surface<br />

has been exceeded. Take extra care as you<br />

continue to drive.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 151 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

151<br />

StabiliTrak ® OFF<br />

in the main instrument panel illuminates<br />

when<br />

• the system has been switched off manually,<br />

speed must be below 60 km/h.<br />

• a fault has arisen in the ABS/StabiliTrak ®<br />

system.<br />

• there is a fault in the system, and at the<br />

same time the following message is<br />

shown on the DIC:<br />

Stability control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Turning the StabiliTrak ® system<br />

off temporarily<br />

The StabiliTrak ® system is switched on<br />

automatically when the engine is started.<br />

It may be necessary to switch off the system<br />

if the car has become bogged down, for<br />

instance.<br />

The StabiliTrak ® system is always active<br />

during braking, even if it has been switched<br />

off, but if a fault arises in the ABS/StabiliTrak<br />

® system the StabiliTrak ® system is<br />

disengaged.<br />

The cruise control system 3 is disengaged<br />

when theStabiliTrak ®® system is operative.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Chassis modifications, such as change of<br />

wheels, bumper or suspension, could<br />

affect the function of the StabiliTrak ®<br />

system.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop before<br />

replacing chassis components.<br />

Disengage the system in Settings.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select ESP (StabiliTrak ® ).<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5Select ON or OFF.<br />

End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Go back/undo using the CLR button.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 152 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

152 Starting and driving<br />

Handbrake<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always apply the handbrake when<br />

you park the car. If the car is to be left<br />

parked for a long time, refer to<br />

page 154.<br />

• Always apply the handbrake before<br />

removing the remote control.<br />

• Do not use the handbrake while<br />

driving.<br />

• Grasp the handbrake lever in such a<br />

way that you do not trap your fingers<br />

when you release the handbrake.<br />

Correct hold<br />

The handbrake lever is situated between<br />

the front seats. The brake acts on the rear<br />

wheels. When the handbrake is applied,<br />

the indicator light on the main instrument<br />

panel will come on.<br />

To release the handbrake, lift the lever<br />

slightly, press the pawl button on the<br />

underside of the lever and lower the lever.<br />

If conditions allow, it is best if the brake<br />

pedal is not depressed, or only depressed<br />

as little as necessary so as to stop the car<br />

rolling, when the handbrake is applied.<br />

To facilitate releasing the handbrake,<br />

depress the brake pedal. This is especially<br />

appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.<br />

If the parking brake is engaged when the car<br />

starts off, the parking brake symbol in the<br />

main instrument panel illuminates and the<br />

following message appears in DIC:<br />

Release park brake.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 153 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Parking<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never leave a child or animal in the<br />

car. In sunny weather the temperature<br />

in the passenger and luggage compartments<br />

can climb to 70–80 °C.<br />

• Park where the vehicle will not create<br />

an obstruction or a hazard to other<br />

road users.<br />

• Never park the car in dry grass or on<br />

other combustible material. The catalytic<br />

converter gets very hot and could<br />

therefore start a fire.<br />

• Apply the handbrake, remove the<br />

remote control from the ignition switch<br />

and lock the car.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:<br />

• never leave valuable items such as a<br />

mobile phone, camera or computer<br />

etc. visible in the car.<br />

• clothing, packages and bags attract<br />

thieves.<br />

• do not leave small objects such as<br />

CDs, sunglasses and coins visible in<br />

the car.<br />

• if possible, park in a well-lit,<br />

conspicuous parking space.<br />

• thieves strike whenever and wherever<br />

they are given the opportunity.<br />

Starting and driving<br />

Parking on a hill<br />

153<br />

When parking on a steep hill, turn the front<br />

wheels so that they will be blocked by the<br />

kerb if the car should move.<br />

If the car is parked with one front wheel<br />

touching the kerb, for example, you may<br />

need to turn the steering wheel slightly<br />

when you insert the remote control to allow<br />

the steering wheel lock to unlock.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 154 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

154 Starting and driving<br />

Laying the car up<br />

If the car is not going to be used for some<br />

time, e.g. three to four months, the following<br />

steps are recommended:<br />

• Drain the washer fluid reservoir and<br />

hoses.<br />

• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber<br />

seals on the bonnet, boot lid and doors,<br />

and lubricate them with glycerol<br />

(glycerine).<br />

• After washing the car, dry the brake discs<br />

to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on<br />

the road and applying the brakes a few<br />

times.<br />

• Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation<br />

forming in it.<br />

• Top up the coolant and check the antifreeze<br />

before the onset of winter.<br />

1 Downhill with kerb.<br />

Turn the wheels toward<br />

the kerb and edge the car<br />

forwards until the wheel<br />

lightly touches the kerb.<br />

2 Uphill with kerb. Turn<br />

the wheels away from the<br />

kerb and edge the car<br />

backward until the wheel<br />

lightly touches the kerb.<br />

3 Uphill or downhill<br />

without kerb. Turn the<br />

wheel towards the verge<br />

so that the car, should it<br />

move, will not roll towards<br />

the middle of the road.<br />

• Park the car in a covered, dry, well-ventilated<br />

area. Do not apply the handbrake!<br />

• If necessary, place chocks under the<br />

wheels.<br />

• Disconnect the negative (-) battery lead.<br />

If frost is likely to occur during the lay-up<br />

period, remove the battery and store it in<br />

a frost-free place.<br />

• If it is not possible to stand the car on axle<br />

stands, increase the tyre pressure<br />

to3bar (43psi).<br />

Leave all the door windows open a crack<br />

and cover the car with a non-plastic<br />

tarpaulin.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 155 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Parking aid system 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Starting and driving<br />

155<br />

Responsibility always lies with the driver<br />

when reversing.<br />

• The parking aid system can facilitate<br />

parking and reversing.<br />

• Bear in mind that small objects, such<br />

as a child lying on the ground, and/or<br />

narrow objects e.g. a post, cannot<br />

always be detected by the system.<br />

The parking aid system facilitates parking<br />

and reversing. There are four sensors in the<br />

rear bumper that detect objects up<br />

to 1.8 metres behind the car.<br />

Area monitored by the sensors seen from<br />

the side<br />

If the car is heavily laden, the system may<br />

falsely indicate that there is an object within<br />

the detection range. This is since the sensors<br />

are angled towards the ground when<br />

the car is tail-heavy.<br />

The system uses four sensors in the rear<br />

bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that<br />

bounce back to the sensors off any objects<br />

behind the car. The system, however,<br />

cannot always detect small or narrow<br />

objects, such as a post, since the reflective<br />

surface presented to the car is too small.<br />

Area monitored by the sensors seen from<br />

above<br />

The system is activated automatically when<br />

reverse is engaged. Audible confirmation is<br />

given and the following text is shown on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Parking Assistance<br />

active.<br />

If a warning message, such as the seat belt<br />

reminder, is shown on the DIC when<br />

reverse is engaged, the audible signals<br />

from the parking aid system will not be<br />

heard since the warning message has<br />

priority.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 156 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

156 Starting and driving<br />

When the sensors detect an object within<br />

the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - - -<br />

) will be heard. The frequency of these<br />

pulses increases as the car comes closer to<br />

the object.<br />

If you stop reversing, the sound pulse will<br />

stop after 2 seconds. The sound pulses will<br />

return if you continue to reverse. If the car<br />

moves forward while reverse is engaged,<br />

the system is silenced.<br />

When the distance to the object is less<br />

than 30 cm, a continuous tone will be<br />

heard.<br />

When an object is approximately 90 cm<br />

from the car, the sound pulses change character<br />

markedly (frequency increases).<br />

A distance of about 90 cm is suitable if<br />

you wish to load or unload the luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The sensors must be kept clean to function<br />

well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect<br />

their sensitivity.<br />

Large quantities of snow or dirt covering<br />

the sensors can prevent the parking aid<br />

system from detecting any objects.<br />

Do not spray the sensors with a pressure<br />

washer, as this can damage them.<br />

Reversing alongside a wall<br />

If the distance between an object and a<br />

corner sensor does not change<br />

for 2 seconds, for example if you are<br />

reversing alongside a wall, the system will<br />

switch to monitoring straight back. The<br />

system indicates if the distance to the wall<br />

decreases again.<br />

Cars with towbar<br />

If the car has a towbar and its wiring is correctly<br />

connected to the car’s electrics, the<br />

parking aid system automatically compensates<br />

for the protrusion of the towbar.<br />

If a caravan or trailer is hitched up and the<br />

towbar wiring is correctly connected to the<br />

car’s electrics, the system is automatically<br />

deactivated.<br />

You can temporarily deactivate the parking<br />

aid system as follows:<br />

• Press the CLR button on the steering<br />

wheel once reverse gear has been<br />

engaged.<br />

The system will be reactivated the next time<br />

you engage reverse.<br />

Error messages<br />

If the system malfunctions, the following<br />

message will appear on the DIC:<br />

Parking assistance<br />

malfunction. Service.<br />

If the system is disrupted by outside interference,<br />

the following message will be shown<br />

on the DIC:<br />

Parking assistance<br />

sensor interference.<br />

If this message appears, clean the sensors.<br />

The sensors are located in the black trim on<br />

the rear bumper.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 157 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

157<br />

The system can be switched off in Settings.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Park Assistance using the<br />

steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Press the SET-button.<br />

5Select ON or OFF using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

6 Confirm this selection by pressing the<br />

SET button.<br />

Park Assistance<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Explanation of ON and OFF.<br />

ON<br />

The parking aid system is activated<br />

automatically when reverse is<br />

engaged. The system warns of objects<br />

behind the car.<br />

If a caravan or trailer is hitched up and<br />

correctly connected to the trailer contact,<br />

the system will be deactivated<br />

automatically. You can also deactivate<br />

the system temporarily with the CLR<br />

button if reverse has been engaged<br />

and the system is active.<br />

OFF<br />

Parking aid system deactivated.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 158 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

158 Starting and driving<br />

Economical motoring<br />

Factors affecting fuel<br />

consumption<br />

The fuel consumption of a car is greatly<br />

affected by driving conditions, climate, road<br />

conditions, speed, driving technique, and so<br />

on.<br />

Running-in<br />

Fuel consumption may be somewhat higher<br />

during the running-in period (the first<br />

3100-4350 miles/5000-7000 km) than<br />

stated values.<br />

Weather conditions<br />

Summer temperatures give better fuel<br />

economy that winter ones. The difference<br />

can be as much as about 10 per cent. Consumption<br />

increases in cold weather<br />

because the engine takes longer to reach its<br />

normal operating temperature. The transmission<br />

and wheel bearings also take<br />

longer to warm up. Even distance affects<br />

consumption: short journeys of three to<br />

five 3 to 5 miles (5-8 km) do not give the<br />

engine enough time to reach its optimum<br />

temperature. Wind conditions also have a<br />

marked effect on consumption.<br />

How to read the diagram (the following<br />

example relates to petrol-engined cars):<br />

If fuel consumption with the engine at normal<br />

temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/100 km), the<br />

actual fuel consumption 3 miles (5 km) after<br />

the engine has started from cold will be:<br />

– 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.<br />

of +20 °C (increase of 20 %).<br />

– 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.<br />

of 0 °C (increase of 60 %).<br />

– 14.1 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.<br />

of –20 °C (increase of 100 %).<br />

It is clear from the diagram that both distance<br />

driven and outside temperature have<br />

a significant impact on fuel consumption,<br />

after a cold start.<br />

If the car is normally driven on short journeys<br />

of 3 to 5 miles (5–8 km), for example<br />

to and from work, the average consumption<br />

will be 60-80 per cent above the normal<br />

level.<br />

Percentage increase in fuel consumption<br />

of engine starting from cold compared to<br />

engine at normal temperature<br />

Driving techniques<br />

• To achieve the best running economy,<br />

with regard to fuel consumption and general<br />

wear, the car must be serviced regularly.<br />

• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,<br />

frequent braking and much changing<br />

down all give higher fuel consumption.<br />

• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting<br />

in cold weather, the use of studded tyres<br />

and roof racks, and towing a caravan all<br />

increase fuel consumption.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 159 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

159<br />

• Do not warm up the engine while the car<br />

is stationary.<br />

If idling, the engine will take much longer<br />

to reach its optimum temperature, and<br />

engine wear is at its greatest during this<br />

period. Drive off as soon as possible after<br />

starting the engine and avoid high engine<br />

speeds.<br />

• Drive as smoothly and carefully as possible.<br />

Match your driving to the prevailing<br />

traffic conditions.<br />

• Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher<br />

fuel consumption than driving in a high<br />

gear because of the higher engine speed<br />

for any given road speed. Always change<br />

up as soon as traffic conditions allow and<br />

drive in the highest gear as much as<br />

possible.<br />

• Check the tyre pressure once a month.<br />

Incorrect tyre pressure increases tyre<br />

wear. It is preferable for the tyre pressure<br />

to be slightly high than too low. Underpressure<br />

increases fuel consumption.<br />

• Check the fuel consumption regularly.<br />

Increased fuel consumption can indicate<br />

that something is wrong and that the car<br />

needs to be checked at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Practical road tests have demonstrated that<br />

substantial savings in fuel consumption can<br />

be made if the above advice is followed.<br />

WARNING<br />

Never switch off the engine while driving<br />

as the effect of the brakes and power<br />

steering will be greatly reduced.<br />

Road conditions<br />

Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do<br />

unmade roads and driving in hilly country<br />

(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is<br />

less than the additional amount required to<br />

climb the hill).<br />

Engine heaters 3<br />

The use of an electric engine heater is<br />

favourable for your car and the environment.<br />

Here are some of the advantages:<br />

• Lower fuel consumption.<br />

• Reduced wear on the engine.<br />

• Cabin warms up faster.<br />

• Considerably lower exhaust emissions on<br />

short journeys.<br />

The engine heater is effective at outside<br />

temperatures up to +15 – +20 °C. The<br />

warmer it is outside, the shorter the time the<br />

engine heater needs to be connected.<br />

Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.<br />

If the car is equipped with a removable,<br />

electric cabin heater that is not in use, store<br />

this in the luggage compartment.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 160 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

160 Starting and driving<br />

Driving in cold climates<br />

In cold weather, special attention should be<br />

paid to the following:<br />

• Before driving off, make sure that the<br />

wiper blades have not frozen to the windscreen.<br />

• Remove any snow from the heating<br />

system air intakes between the bonnet<br />

and the windscreen.<br />

• If necessary, inject oil into the locks to prevent<br />

them from freezing. Use molybdenum-sulphide<br />

oil (MoS 2 ). If the locks<br />

freeze, exercise care when unlocking the<br />

car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking<br />

the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.<br />

• It is particularly important when the roads<br />

are slippery that the brakes and tyres are<br />

in good condition.<br />

• For how to check the level of antifreeze in<br />

the engine coolant, see page 182.<br />

• Add carburettor spirit when refuelling several<br />

times before the onset of winter. This<br />

will prevent condensation water in the fuel<br />

tank from freezing and causing interruptions<br />

in the fuel supply. The likelihood of<br />

condensation is lowest when the fuel tank<br />

is full.<br />

If the car is parked outside and the temperature<br />

is below zero, carburettor spirit is<br />

of little use as it cannot remove water that<br />

has already frozen. Park the car in a warm<br />

place so that any ice that may have built<br />

up melts, then add carburettor spirit when<br />

refuelling.<br />

Condensation is caused by temperature<br />

fluctuations, either in the outside temperature<br />

alone or when the car is alternately<br />

parked outdoors and in a garage.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: Make sure that<br />

you use winter grade fuel. At very low<br />

temperatures, paraffin crystals can<br />

develop in the fuel, which can block the<br />

fuel filter and starve the engine of fuel.<br />

Park the car in a warm place so that the<br />

paraffin crystals melt. See also "Cars with<br />

diesel engine 3" on page 135.<br />

The car is equipped with tyres designed to<br />

provide optimum grip on both wet and dry<br />

roads, although this has been achieved at<br />

the expense of somewhat reduced grip on<br />

snow and ice. For regular driving on snow<br />

and ice, we therefore recommend that<br />

winter tyres be fitted. However, winter tyres<br />

achieve this extra grip at the expense of grip<br />

on bare road surfaces.<br />

Winter tyres, particularly studded tyres,<br />

generally make driving safer on snow and<br />

ice.<br />

Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions<br />

governing the use of different<br />

types of winter tyres and snow chains.<br />

Studded tyres are not allowed in some<br />

countries. If winter tyres are fitted, the<br />

same type must be fitted to all four wheels.<br />

A local workshop will be able to advise you<br />

on suitable tyres for your car. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 161 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

161<br />

Remember that tyres age: it may therefore<br />

be necessary to change winter tyres before<br />

they reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually<br />

lose their friction properties with age.<br />

If you get into a front wheel skid and the car<br />

has a manual gearbox, the best response is<br />

to freewheel, which means declutching so<br />

that the wheels neither drive nor brake, and<br />

to cautiously steer in the desired direction.<br />

If the car has automatic transmission,<br />

ease off the accelerator slightly and steer<br />

cautiously in the desired direction.<br />

If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the<br />

same direction as the movement of the rear<br />

of the car.<br />

Driving with snow chains 3<br />

Snow chains must only be fitted to the wheel<br />

and tyre dimensions that we recommend in<br />

"Technical data" on page 235.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop regarding approved<br />

snow chains.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph<br />

(50 km/h) when snow chains are<br />

fitted.<br />

• Snow chains can reduce directional<br />

stability.<br />

• Do not fit snow chains to the car’s rear<br />

wheels.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Check the links frequently for wear.<br />

• Check that the chains do not foul the<br />

wheel arch liner at full lock.<br />

• Refer to the "Technical data" section<br />

on page 235, for information on wheel<br />

and tyre dimensions approved for the<br />

fitting of snow chains.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 162 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

162 Starting and driving<br />

Driving in hot climates<br />

Always check the coolant level before<br />

starting a journey. When the engine is cold,<br />

the coolant level must be on or just above<br />

the KALT/COLD mark (boundary between<br />

the upper and lower sections of the tank).<br />

At the end of a journey, allow the engine to<br />

idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.<br />

If the needle on the temperature gauge<br />

enters the red zone, the following message<br />

will be shown on the DIC:<br />

Hot engine. Make a<br />

safe stop. Idle engine.<br />

1 Stop the car but do not switch off the<br />

engine. Do not remove the cap on the<br />

cooling system expansion tank, even if<br />

the tank is empty. The engine temperature<br />

should decrease. If the temperature<br />

continues to rise with the engine idling,<br />

the engine must be switched off.<br />

2 If the engine is idling and the needle on<br />

the temperature gauge falls, wait until a<br />

normal temperature is shown (about in<br />

the middle of the scale) before switching<br />

off the engine. If the coolant needs to be<br />

topped up, carefully unscrew the<br />

expansion tank cap.<br />

Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %<br />

antifreeze and 50 % clean water. Use an<br />

antifreeze approved by <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Exercise care when opening the<br />

bonnet if the engine is overheated.<br />

Never remove the expansion tank cap<br />

completely when the engine is hot.<br />

• The cooling system is pressurised - hot<br />

coolant and vapour can escape. These<br />

can cause injury to your eyes and<br />

burns. Open the cap slowly to release<br />

the pressure before removing it.<br />

3 Have the car’s cooling system checked<br />

at a workshop. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: The engine<br />

has a protective function that prevents it<br />

from overheating. The engine output is<br />

reduced when the engine temperature is<br />

so high that the needle enters the red<br />

zone.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 163 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Towing a caravan or<br />

trailer 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Do not drive with a caravan or trailer<br />

on inclines steeper than 15 %. The<br />

load on the drive (front) wheels will be<br />

so low that the wheels can start to spin<br />

and prevent further progress.<br />

• In addition, the car’s handbrake may<br />

not always be sufficient to hold the car<br />

and caravan securely, as the wheels<br />

may start to slide.<br />

• Always apply the trailer’s or caravan’s<br />

parking brake when unhitching it. Otherwise,<br />

there is a risk of personal injury<br />

or damage to the bumper should the<br />

caravan or trailer start to roll.<br />

Make sure you are familiar with the legal<br />

requirements regarding speed limits for<br />

towing, maximum caravan weights,<br />

caravan braking requirements, and also<br />

any special driving licence provisions.<br />

Towbar 3<br />

A towbar is available as an option. It is<br />

designed for a trailer weight of<br />

max. 1600 kg.<br />

An electrical connection 3 for the towbar<br />

and an electrical unit are provided in the<br />

electrical centre on the left-hand side of the<br />

luggage compartment.<br />

If the car has a 13-pin <strong>Cadillac</strong> genuine electrical<br />

socket then it is possible to supply a<br />

trailer/caravan with rear fog lights and<br />

reversing lights. The caravan can also have<br />

interior and exterior lighting even when the<br />

car’s ignition is switched off. In which case,<br />

remember not to load the battery for too<br />

long so that it is discharged and prevents<br />

the car from starting.<br />

There is also access to power in the caravan<br />

during a journey, the caravan battery can be<br />

charged for example.<br />

An adapter is required to connect a caravan<br />

or trailer with 7-pin connector 3.<br />

If the car has the parking aid system, this is<br />

deactivated automatically if a caravan or<br />

trailer is hitched up and connected to the<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> genuine trailer socket.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Starting and driving<br />

163<br />

• Only use a towbar that has been<br />

approved for your car. We recommend<br />

that you entrust towbar installation<br />

to an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop,<br />

which can also provide<br />

important information such as trailer<br />

weight. Your authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop has information on how the<br />

towbar is to be installed and whether<br />

other measures must be undertaken<br />

that could affect the cooling system or<br />

other equipment.<br />

• We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop for<br />

advice on which towbar is designed for<br />

your car as well as for connecting a<br />

towbar.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 164 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

164 Starting and driving<br />

• If the caravan or trailer has additional<br />

electrical equipment, besides the<br />

standard exterior lighting (e.g. interior<br />

lighting, a fan or a charger for a separate<br />

battery) and it is connected to the<br />

car via the trailer contact, to be provided<br />

with a separate power supply,<br />

the caravan or trailer must have a<br />

13-pin connector as specified in<br />

ISO 11446.<br />

• Exercise care when driving on uneven<br />

roads or against the kerb if the car is<br />

heavily laden or when towing a caravan<br />

or trailer. This particularly<br />

applies to cars with 18" wheels.<br />

Recommendations for cars with<br />

automatic transmission<br />

The following driving time limits are based<br />

on the capacity of the cooling system in hot<br />

weather, i.e. approximately +30 °C.<br />

Gradient of<br />

hill, %<br />

Max. caravan<br />

weight, kg<br />

Time limit,<br />

minutes<br />

6–8 1500 unlimited<br />

9–11 1400 max 15<br />

12–14 1200 max 15<br />

max. 15 1000 max 15<br />

When negotiating long hills, bear the following<br />

important considerations in mind.<br />

Rises in coolant temperature are indicated<br />

by the temperature gauge in the main instrument<br />

panel.<br />

The following steps are taken in order as the<br />

temperature of the transmission increases:<br />

• Gear change pattern is altered<br />

• A/C compressor is switched off<br />

• Max. engine torque is reduced


460_OM_MY09.book Page 165 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

165<br />

The following message will be displayed on<br />

the DIC if the transmission fluid becomes<br />

too hot:<br />

Gearbox too hot. Make a<br />

safe stop. Open hood.<br />

If this message appears, stop the car as<br />

soon as it is safe to do so and allow the<br />

engine to idle until the message has gone<br />

out. The selector lever should be in<br />

position P.<br />

When continuing your journey, manually<br />

select a low gear in which the engine speed<br />

is about 3500 rpm until the incline eases,<br />

see page 143.<br />

WARNING<br />

Utilise the braking effect of the engine<br />

(gear M1, M2 or M3) when you are<br />

descending long or steep hills to spare<br />

the brakes.<br />

Overheating can cause the brakes to<br />

fade!<br />

Recommendations for cars with<br />

manual gearbox<br />

Rises in coolant temperature are indicated<br />

by the temperature gauge in the main instrument<br />

panel.<br />

When the needle is just outside the red<br />

zone, the A/C compressor will be switched<br />

off and, on certain engine variants, the maximum<br />

engine torque will be limited.<br />

When continuing your journey, select a<br />

low gear in which the engine speed is<br />

about 3500 rpm until the incline eases.<br />

WARNING<br />

Utilise the braking effect of the engine<br />

(1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you are<br />

descending long or steep hills to spare<br />

the brakes.<br />

Overheating can cause the brakes to<br />

fade!<br />

Towbar load<br />

The weight distribution on the caravan<br />

makes a lot of difference to the handling<br />

properties of the car and caravan combination.<br />

As regards two-wheel caravans, concentrate<br />

the load over the wheels and keep<br />

it as low as possible.<br />

Distribution of load in caravan<br />

aLight<br />

b Moderate<br />

c Heavy<br />

The caravan should be loaded so that the<br />

load on the towball is 50–75 kg. Note that<br />

this load must be included in the total load<br />

for the car. If this now exceeds the specified<br />

load capacity, the load in the luggage compartment<br />

may have to be reduced by the<br />

corresponding amount.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 166 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

166 Starting and driving<br />

Driving with a roof load<br />

WARNING<br />

• A roof load will affect the car’s centre<br />

of gravity and aerodynamics. Be<br />

aware of this when cornering and<br />

driving in crosswinds.<br />

• Suit your speed to the prevailing<br />

conditions.<br />

The maximum permissible roof load<br />

is 100 kg. Note that the roof load must be<br />

included in the car’s maximum permissible<br />

payload and axle load.<br />

Strong, sturdy roof carriers 3 designed specially<br />

for your car are available. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> dealer. Always fasten roof loads<br />

securely.<br />

Driving with a load<br />

The handling characteristics are affected by<br />

how the car is loaded.<br />

• Place the heaviest load as far forward and<br />

as low as possible in the luggage compartment.<br />

• Secure the load to the lashing eyes, see<br />

page 112.<br />

• Heavy loads mean that the car’s centre of<br />

gravity is further back. As a result, the car<br />

will sway more during evasive steering.<br />

• Never exceed the permissible load of the<br />

roof box 3 even if there is room for more.<br />

• Ensure that the tyre pressure is correct –<br />

slight overinflation is preferable to underinflation.<br />

See also page 210 and 245.<br />

• The braking distance of a loaded car is<br />

always greater. Keep your distance from<br />

the vehicle in front.<br />

• Do not exceed the car’s permissible gross<br />

vehicle weight or axle load, see page 236.<br />

• Roof loads can negatively affect<br />

telecommunication.<br />

Driving with the luggage<br />

compartment open<br />

Avoid driving with the boot lid partly or fully<br />

open, since exhaust fumes can be drawn<br />

into the cabin.<br />

If you must drive with the boot lid open,<br />

close all windows and the sunroof (if fitted)<br />

and set the cabin fan to its highest speed<br />

setting.<br />

Driving through deep<br />

water<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not drive through puddles or water<br />

deeper than 20 cm and do not drive faster<br />

than at idling speed. Water can otherwise<br />

be drawn into the engine. The engine will<br />

be damaged if water enters the intake<br />

system.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 167 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Towing<br />

Front towing eye<br />

Starting and driving<br />

167<br />

WARNING<br />

• Remember that the brake servo does<br />

not operate when the engine is off.<br />

Much greater pressure than normal<br />

will therefore be required to operate<br />

the brake pedal.<br />

• Nor does the steering servo operate<br />

when the engine is off. The steering<br />

will therefore be much heavier than<br />

usual.<br />

• The towing vehicle should always be<br />

heavier than the vehicle on tow.<br />

• Never allow passengers to ride in the<br />

car when it is on tow.<br />

• Always seek professional help if the<br />

car needs to be recovered.<br />

• The ignition switch must be in<br />

position 3 if the car is moved with the<br />

engine not running.<br />

• The steering wheel lock must be disengaged<br />

before towing the car.<br />

• The steering wheel lock disengages<br />

when the remote control is inserted<br />

into the ignition switch, if the car battery<br />

has sufficient charge.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Make sure that the towing eye is<br />

screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand<br />

thread!<br />

• The towing eye is only designed for<br />

towing the car on roads. It must not be<br />

used to pull the car out of a ditch, for<br />

example.<br />

• Make sure that all bystanders keep a<br />

suitable distance, in case the towing<br />

eye or tow rope should snap. The<br />

towing eye or tow rope could catapult<br />

off and cause seriously injury.<br />

• Never drive with the towing eye fitted<br />

to the front bumper. Return it to its<br />

designated storage space.<br />

Front towing eye.<br />

The towing eye has a left-hand thread!<br />

The front towing eye is stowed by the spare<br />

wheel. On the right-hand side of the bumper<br />

is a cover concealing the attachment point<br />

(tapped hole) for the towing eye.<br />

1 Press the knob on the upper section of<br />

this cover at the same time as pulling out<br />

the lower edge.<br />

2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing<br />

eye has a left-hand thread!<br />

3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to<br />

tighten it properly.<br />

To refit the cover: Start by inserting the top<br />

edge of the cover. Then click in the lower<br />

edge, one corner at a time.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 168 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

168 Starting and driving<br />

Rear towing eye<br />

Rear towing eye<br />

The car has a permanent towing eye at the<br />

rear under the bumper.<br />

If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can<br />

be used instead of the towing eye.<br />

Towing the car<br />

Cars with manual gearbox<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Never use the towing eyes to pull the<br />

car unstuck<br />

• Release the handbrake if the car is to<br />

be towed on its rear wheels.<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> <strong>BLS</strong> AWD with manual gearbox:<br />

If the car is towed with all four wheels on<br />

the ground then there are no technical<br />

limitations for speed and distance.<br />

If both front wheels or both rear wheels<br />

have been raised, and if the law permits,<br />

the maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.<br />

There are no limitations as to the distance<br />

over which the car can be towed.<br />

Set the gear lever in neutral position. Switch<br />

on the position light.<br />

The national regulations on towing<br />

speeds must be followed.<br />

Always try to keep the towrope taut by<br />

gently applying the brake of the car on tow,<br />

as necessary. This will avoid the towrope<br />

being jerked violently.<br />

Cars with automatic transmission<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Do not tow the car backwards.<br />

• Release the handbrake if the car is to<br />

be towed on its rear wheels.<br />

•Do not tow the car backwards.<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> <strong>BLS</strong> AWD with automatic transmission:<br />

If the car is towed with all four wheels on<br />

the ground then it may be towed at a<br />

maximum speed of 50 km/h and for a<br />

maximum of 50 km.<br />

If both front wheels have been raised, and<br />

if the law permits, the car may be towed at<br />

a maximum speed of 50 km/h. There are<br />

no technical limitations as to the distance<br />

over which the car can be towed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 169 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Set the selector lever in the N position.<br />

Switch on the position light.<br />

The national regulations on towing<br />

speeds must be followed.<br />

Always try to keep the towrope taut by<br />

gently applying the brake of the car on tow,<br />

as necessary. This will avoid the towrope<br />

being jerked violently.<br />

If the law permits, the maximum permitted<br />

towing speed is 50 km/h. The maximum<br />

permitted towing distance is 50 km. If the<br />

car needs to be transported further than this<br />

then a breakdown truck must be sent for.<br />

The engine cannot be started by towing or<br />

pushing the car. In an emergency, the<br />

engine can be started as described under<br />

"Jump starting" on page 170.<br />

Never use the towing eyes to pull the car<br />

unstuck<br />

Starting and driving<br />

Vehicle recovery<br />

169<br />

If the car has to be transported on a<br />

recovery vehicle or similar, it must be<br />

securely strapped down. There are attachment<br />

points for this purpose on the underside<br />

of the car. The attachment points are<br />

oblong hole that have been reinforced to<br />

cope with the stresses that arise during this<br />

type of transport.<br />

Transporting the car<br />

NOTICE<br />

If a car with sport (lowered) chassis is<br />

transported, for example on a breakdown<br />

truck, take extra care not to damage the<br />

spoiler and undercarriage.<br />

Attachment points for anchorage straps


460_OM_MY09.book Page 170 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

170 Starting and driving<br />

Driving with the<br />

compact spare wheel<br />

See page 216.<br />

Tyre repair kit 3<br />

On certain markets, the spare wheel has<br />

been replaced by a tyre repair kit. Using this<br />

repair kit, the punctured tyre can be inflated<br />

without having to remove the wheel.<br />

See page 223.<br />

Jump starting<br />

WARNING<br />

• When working on the battery, highly<br />

explosive gas can build up. A spark<br />

could ignite this gas that collects<br />

around the battery. Therefore, always<br />

avoid sparks and naked flames in the<br />

vicinity of the battery.<br />

• The battery contains corrosive sulphuric<br />

acid. Always wear a face mask<br />

or goggles when working on the<br />

battery.<br />

• If battery acid gets into the eyes or<br />

splashes onto skin or clothing, wash<br />

the affected area with liberal amounts<br />

of water. If acid gets into the eyes or a<br />

large quantity makes contact with the<br />

skin, seek medical help.<br />

Jump starting<br />

It is essential when a donor battery is to be<br />

used to jump start the car that the jump<br />

leads be connected correctly to prevent<br />

arcing.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The cross sectional area of the jump<br />

leads must be at least 16 mm 2 for petrolengined<br />

cars and 25 mm 2 for dieselengined<br />

cars.<br />

The leads must not be more<br />

than 3 metres long.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 171 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

171<br />

1 Switch off the ignition and all currentconsuming<br />

devices (lighting, rear<br />

window heating, etc.).<br />

2 Switch off the donor car’s engine.<br />

3 Start by connecting the positive (+) terminal<br />

of the donor battery to the positive<br />

terminal on the flat battery.<br />

4 Next, connect the negative (-) terminal<br />

of the donor battery to the negative (-)<br />

terminal of the flat battery.<br />

5 Start the engine of the donor car.<br />

6 Now start the engine of the host car.<br />

Allow the engine to run for a while and<br />

then disconnect the donor battery in the<br />

reverse order.<br />

Note. If the voltage of the flat battery is<br />

very low, it may be necessary to have<br />

jump leads connected for several minutes<br />

before starting the car with the flat<br />

battery.<br />

If the starter motor does not turn over at first<br />

try, wait 3–5 minutes before trying again.<br />

Charging the battery 3/jump<br />

starting<br />

To avoid damaging the car’s electrical<br />

system and electronics, the following rules<br />

must be followed when charging the battery<br />

or jump starting the car.<br />

• If the charger or starter unit can be set to<br />

different voltages (6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V<br />

must be selected.<br />

• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions<br />

supplied with the charger or starter unit.<br />

• No other apparatus that are grounded or<br />

connected to the mains must be connected<br />

to the car during charging or jump<br />

starting.<br />

• The charger or starter unit must under no<br />

conditions produce a voltage greater<br />

than:<br />

• 16V continuous<br />

• 18V for 60 minutes.<br />

• If you are unsure about the charge rating<br />

of the unit, disconnect the battery clamp<br />

from the positive terminal before<br />

connecting the unit to the battery.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 172 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

172 Starting and driving<br />

Before long journeys<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> has a brochure containing the<br />

address of authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> servicing<br />

workshops throughout <strong>Europe</strong>. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Before setting off on a long journey, it is<br />

advisable to have the car checked over at a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Make sure that you have essential spares<br />

with you on your journey, such as bulbs,<br />

fuses, wiper blades and a drive belt<br />

(poly-V-belt).<br />

There are a number of items you can check<br />

yourself before the journey:<br />

• Check that oil or fuel does not leak from<br />

the engine or gearbox.<br />

• Check the poly-V-belt (drive belt). Have it<br />

replaced if it shows any signs of wear.<br />

• Check the battery charge.<br />

• Check the tread and pressure of all tyres,<br />

including the spare wheel. Refer to<br />

page 245 for tyre pressures.<br />

• Take along an extra remote control. Carry<br />

this separately.<br />

• Check the speed rating on the tyres to<br />

ensure that you do not exceed the maximum<br />

permitted speed for the tyres if<br />

motoring on derestricted roads. Refer to<br />

"Tyre markings" on page 211.<br />

• Check the brakes.<br />

• Check all lights and bulbs.<br />

• Check the tool kit.<br />

• Wintertime: check whether studded tyres<br />

are allowed in the country to which you<br />

are travelling.<br />

• Make sure you are carrying a warning triangle.<br />

Acquaint yourself with the regulations<br />

that apply to its use in the county to<br />

which you are travelling.<br />

Turn the height adjuster screw 3 turns<br />

anticlockwise to adjust the light beam<br />

downwards if you are switching from righthand<br />

traffic to left-hand traffic or<br />

vice versa.<br />

This is most suitable done with a 6 mm<br />

hex socket wrench.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 173 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

173<br />

Car care<br />

Bonnet ______________ 174<br />

Engine ______________ 175<br />

Turbo petrol engine,<br />

4-cyl _______________ 176<br />

Diesel engine 3 _______ 178<br />

Engine oil ____________ 180<br />

Air filter______________ 181<br />

Transmission fluid ____ 181<br />

Coolant______________ 182<br />

Brake/clutch fluid and<br />

braking lining _______ 184<br />

Power steering________ 185<br />

Battery ______________ 186<br />

Drive belt ____________ 188<br />

Wipers and washers ___ 188<br />

Wiper blades _________ 188<br />

Changing bulbs _______ 190<br />

Fuses ________________ 204<br />

Wheels _______________ 210<br />

Spare wheel ___________ 216<br />

Changing wheels ______ 219<br />

Seatbelts _____________ 227<br />

Upholstery ____________ 228<br />

Textile carpeting _______ 228<br />

Engine bay____________ 230<br />

Washing______________ 228<br />

Waxing and polishing ___ 230<br />

Touching up paintwork__ 230<br />

Anti-corrosion treatment 231<br />

Service programme ____ 232<br />

Materials used in the<br />

car: reclamation ______ 232<br />

Air conditioning (A/C) ___ 233<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 174 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

174 Car care<br />

Bonnet<br />

The bonnet lock handle is located under the<br />

fascia on the driver’s side. Open the bonnet<br />

as follows:<br />

1 Pull the release handle.<br />

2 The bonnet opens to the half-locked<br />

position, being arrested by a catch at the<br />

front edge.<br />

3 Press the catch plate upwards and raise<br />

the bonnet.<br />

When closing the bonnet, drop it from a<br />

height of about 30 cm, without pushing it<br />

down.<br />

Bonnet lock handle<br />

Bonnet release catch plate


460_OM_MY09.book Page 175 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Engine<br />

Turbo petrol engine, 4-cyl<br />

The engine is a transverse, four-cylinder,<br />

in-line engine with dual overhead camshaft<br />

and 16 valves. The engine block and cylinder<br />

head are made of aluminium.<br />

The engine is equipped with two balancer<br />

shafts that reduce engine vibrations to a<br />

minimum.<br />

The balance shafts are chain driven and<br />

rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.<br />

They produce forces and torques that are<br />

opposed to those generated by the pistons<br />

and connecting rods, an effect that occurs<br />

twice for each revolution of the engine.<br />

Engine noise is therefore also reduced as<br />

the counter-rotating shafts counteract the<br />

vibration from the moving parts of the<br />

engine.<br />

The gearbox, located on the left-hand side<br />

of the engine, is integrated with the engine.<br />

Turbo petrol engine, V6 3<br />

The V6 engine is a turbo charged V6<br />

engine. The engine block and cylinder head<br />

are made of aluminium with 60° between<br />

the cylinder banks, 4 valves per cylinder and<br />

2 camshafts per bank.<br />

The camshafts are driven via a chain transmission.<br />

The engine is equipped with a<br />

turbo whose turbine collects exhaust pressure<br />

from both banks of cylinders.<br />

To obtain optimum performance, fuel consumption<br />

and low emission levels the<br />

engine is equipped with CVCP (Continuous<br />

Variable Cam Phasing). This means that<br />

the engine’s intake camshafts can be<br />

adjusted to achieve optimum functionality.<br />

The switches are hydraulic.<br />

Diesel engine 3<br />

Car care<br />

175<br />

The diesel engine is a transverse, fourcylinder,<br />

in-line engine. The engine has<br />

16 valves and dual overhead camshafts.<br />

The gearbox, located on the left-hand side<br />

of the engine, is integrated with the engine.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 176 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

176 Car care<br />

Turbo petrol engine, 4-cyl<br />

1 Oil filler cap<br />

2 Coolant expansion tank<br />

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir<br />

4Battery<br />

5 Fuses<br />

6 Washer fluid reservoir<br />

7 Power steering fluid reservoir<br />

8 Engine oil dipstick


460_OM_MY09.book Page 177 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Turbo petrol engine, V6 3<br />

Car care<br />

177<br />

1 Power steering fluid reservoir<br />

2 Coolant expansion tank<br />

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir<br />

4Battery<br />

5 Fuses<br />

6 Washer fluid reservoir<br />

7 Oil filler cap<br />

8 Engine oil dipstick


460_OM_MY09.book Page 178 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

178 Car care<br />

Diesel engine, TiD 3<br />

1 Oil filler cap<br />

2 Coolant expansion tank<br />

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir<br />

4Battery<br />

5 Fuses<br />

6 Washer fluid reservoir<br />

7 Power steering fluid reservoir<br />

8 Engine oil dipstick


460_OM_MY09.book Page 179 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Diesel engine, TTiD 3<br />

Car care<br />

179<br />

1 Oil filler cap<br />

2 Coolant expansion tank<br />

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir<br />

4Battery<br />

5 Fuses<br />

6 Washer fluid reservoir<br />

7 Power steering fluid reservoir<br />

8 Engine oil dipstick


460_OM_MY09.book Page 180 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

180 Car care<br />

Engine oil<br />

Checking the engine oil<br />

Check the engine oil level regularly.<br />

1 Park the car on a level surface.<br />

2 Switch off the engine and wait for<br />

2–5 minutes (diesel engine: 5 min.).<br />

The engine should be at normal<br />

operating temperature.<br />

3 Withdraw the dipstick and wipe it with a<br />

clean rag before checking the oil level.<br />

The oil level must not be below the MIN<br />

mark on the dipstick, but nor should it be<br />

above the MAX mark, since this could result<br />

in abnormal oil consumption.<br />

The distance between the MIN and MAX<br />

marks is equivalent to 1.0 l.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Too high an oil level can damage the<br />

engine.<br />

2.0 Turbo (210 hp):<br />

When the engine is started, the engine oil<br />

level is checked. If the level is too low, the<br />

following message appears on the DIC:<br />

Checkoil level.<br />

If this occurs the oil level must be checked<br />

first. If the level is too low then it must be<br />

topped up.<br />

1.9TiD and 1.9 TTiD:<br />

The engine is equipped with an engine oil<br />

level sensor that is active when the engine<br />

is running. If the level sinks too low, the following<br />

message appears on the DIC:<br />

Checkoil level.<br />

If this occurs the oil level must be checked<br />

first. If the level is too low then it must be<br />

topped up.<br />

Oil filler cap and dipstick, turbo petrol<br />

engine, 4-cyl


460_OM_MY09.book Page 181 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Air filter<br />

Car care<br />

181<br />

WARNING<br />

To ensure reliable operation, only use an<br />

air filter recommended by <strong>Cadillac</strong> when<br />

changing. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Oil filler cap and dipstick, turbo petrol<br />

engine, V6<br />

Recommended oil grade, see car’s<br />

Service Book.<br />

Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap<br />

properly after topping up the oil to avoid running<br />

problems.<br />

It is normal for a certain amount of oil to be<br />

consumed. It is therefore often necessary to<br />

top up the oil between services. Check the<br />

engine oil level regularly.<br />

While running in (approx. 3,100 miles<br />

or 5,000 km) and when driving at high<br />

speeds or with a caravan, the oil consumption<br />

may be higher than normal.<br />

Oil filler cap and dipstick, diesel engine<br />

Transmission fluid<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox<br />

The transmission fluid should be changed in<br />

accordance with the Service Programme.<br />

Automatic transmission<br />

The transmission fluid should be changed in<br />

accordance with the Service Programme.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 182 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

182 Car care<br />

Coolant<br />

WARNING<br />

• Be careful when opening the bonnet if<br />

the engine is overheated. Never undo<br />

the expansion tank cap fully while the<br />

coolant is hot.<br />

• The cooling system is pressurised.<br />

This can cause hot coolant and vapour<br />

can escape causing injury to your<br />

eyes and burns.<br />

• Exercise care when adding glycol.<br />

Glycol on hot surfaces constitutes a<br />

fire risk.<br />

There is an overpressure in the cooling<br />

system. Coolant temperatures can sometimes<br />

exceed 100 °C.<br />

If the level of coolant in the expansion tank<br />

drops too low, the following message<br />

appears on the DIC:<br />

Coolant level low.<br />

Refill.<br />

The properties of the coolant are retained<br />

for the entire service life of the car. Therefore,<br />

it is not necessary to change the<br />

coolant.<br />

The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and<br />

anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best<br />

cooling effect. Lower concentrations should<br />

be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.<br />

Coolants of a different brand could damage<br />

the engine or cooling system. We therefore<br />

recommend strict use of coolants that have<br />

been approved by <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

If the expansion tank is empty when coolant<br />

is added, run the engine until warm so that<br />

the thermostat opens. Top up the tank<br />

again, as necessary.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If coolant requires filling, first blend equal<br />

parts coolant and tap water or distilled<br />

water.<br />

If straight coolant is added, the engine<br />

could still freeze and be damaged. This is<br />

because the concentrated coolant will not<br />

mix properly with the coolant until the<br />

thermostat has opened to allow full circulation.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 183 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

183<br />

Cooling system expansion tank, turbo<br />

petrol engine, 4-cyl<br />

Cars with 4-cyl. engine: The expansion<br />

tank is transparent to facilitate checking the<br />

coolant level.<br />

When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie<br />

on or just above the KALT/COLD mark on<br />

the expansion tank (boundary between the<br />

upper and lower sections of the tank, see<br />

illustration).<br />

Top up with a mixture of equal parts of<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong>-approved concentrated coolant<br />

and clean water. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Cooling system expansion tank, turbo<br />

petrol engine, V6<br />

Cars with V6 engine: The expansion tank<br />

is not transparent. The cap must be<br />

unscrewed so that the coolant level can be<br />

checked. When the cap is screwed off there<br />

are two level markings, HOT and COLD.<br />

When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie<br />

on or just above the COLD mark.<br />

Level markings, turbo petrol engine, V6<br />

1 HOT<br />

2 COLD


460_OM_MY09.book Page 184 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

184 Car care<br />

Brake/clutch fluid and<br />

braking lining<br />

Checking<br />

Brake fluid should be changed according to<br />

the service programme. Refer to the Warranty<br />

and Service Book.<br />

The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is transparent<br />

to facilitate checking of the fluid level.<br />

The fluid level should lie between the MAX<br />

and MIN marks.<br />

If the fluid level is too low, the following message<br />

will be displayed on the DIC:<br />

Brake fluid level low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake<br />

fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.<br />

Use only new brake fluid from a sealed<br />

container.<br />

The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as<br />

the braking lining wears. The MAX level in<br />

the reservoir corresponds to the amount of<br />

brake fluid required with new braking lining.<br />

If the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to<br />

normal brake lining wear, topping up is not<br />

necessary.<br />

If the brake fluid should require<br />

changing, this must be carried out at a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Brake fluid reservoir


460_OM_MY09.book Page 185 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

The foot brake and handbrake are selfadjusting.<br />

It is not possible to detect, through abnormal<br />

pedal or handbrake lever travel, whether the<br />

braking lining is worn and needs replacing.<br />

It is therefore essential that brake lining be<br />

checked regularly, as specified in the<br />

service programme.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,<br />

since it can cause corrosion damage.<br />

Braking lining replacement should be<br />

entrusted to a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Power steering<br />

Check the level of the power steering fluid in<br />

the reservoir regularly, in accordance with<br />

the service programme.<br />

The wheels should point directly forwards<br />

during this check.<br />

Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.<br />

Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw<br />

down the cap completely and then remove<br />

it again.<br />

The oil level should lie between the MAX<br />

and MIN marks when the oil temperature is<br />

about +20 °C. If the oil is colder, the level<br />

may be lower, and at a higher temperatures<br />

the level may be higher.<br />

Top up with "CHF 11S power steering fluid"<br />

or "CHF 202".<br />

Car care<br />

185<br />

Power steering fluid reservoir, turbo petrol<br />

engine, 4-cyl<br />

Power steering fluid reservoir, turbo petrol<br />

engine, V6.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 186 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

186 Car care<br />

Power steering fluid reservoir, diesel<br />

engine<br />

Battery<br />

WARNING<br />

• When working on the battery, highly<br />

explosive gas can build up. A spark<br />

could ignite this gas that collects<br />

around the battery.<br />

Therefore, always avoid sparks and<br />

naked flames in the vicinity of the battery.<br />

• The battery contains corrosive sulphuric<br />

acid. Always wear a face mask or<br />

goggles when working on the battery.<br />

• If battery acid gets into the eyes or<br />

splashes onto skin or clothing, wash<br />

the affected area with liberal amounts<br />

of water.<br />

If acid gets into the eyes or a large<br />

quantity makes contact with the skin,<br />

seek medical help.<br />

NOTICE<br />

A discharged battery can freeze and fracture.<br />

Batteries should therefore always be<br />

stored away from sub-zero temperatures.<br />

The battery is maintenance-free.<br />

If frequent short journeys are made, the battery<br />

may need extra charging. This can be<br />

done with a battery charger or by taking the<br />

car for a long run.<br />

If the battery is not charging while driving,<br />

the driving symbol in the main instrument<br />

panel illuminates and the following message<br />

appears on the DIC:<br />

Battery not charging.<br />

Make a safe stop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 187 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

187<br />

Check the drive belt, see page 188. If the<br />

belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,<br />

the battery may not be charged, the A/C<br />

compressor may not work and power assistance<br />

for the steering (diesel-engined cars)<br />

may be lost.<br />

Always connect the positive (red) cable to<br />

the positive (+) battery terminal, and the<br />

negative (black) cable to the negative (-)<br />

battery terminal. Remove both battery<br />

cables when rapid-charging the battery.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Do not connect the battery terminals,<br />

+ and –, incorrectly.<br />

• Serious damage can be done to the<br />

car’s electrical system if a battery or<br />

alternator lead is disconnected while<br />

the engine is running.<br />

• Cars with petrol engine: exercise special<br />

care when removing and fitting the<br />

positive (+) cable so as not to damage<br />

the battery disconnect switch 3.<br />

Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to<br />

unlock the battery cover<br />

1.9TiD and 1.9 TTiD with fuel-driven<br />

heater has a larger battery and consequently<br />

no battery cover.<br />

Battery bracket<br />

A car with standard equipment specifications<br />

and a fully charged battery can be left<br />

for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient<br />

charge for starting. If extra equipment is<br />

fitted, such as a mobile phone, the charge<br />

may only be sufficient for about 15 days.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 188 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

188 Car care<br />

Drive belt<br />

WARNING<br />

• Keep hands and clothing well clear of<br />

the drive belt when the engine is running.<br />

• Always stop the engine before<br />

inspecting the drive belt.<br />

• The radiator fan is electric and can<br />

start even when the engine is<br />

switched off.<br />

A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can result<br />

in:<br />

• insufficient engine cooling (dieselengined<br />

cars)<br />

• no charge to the battery<br />

• no A/C compressor function<br />

• loss of power-assistance for steering<br />

(diesel-engined cars).<br />

The belt tension is critical and is adjusted<br />

automatically by the belt tensioner.<br />

Wipers and washers<br />

Wiper blades<br />

Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.<br />

We recommend washer fluid for cleaning.<br />

If poor wiper performance is experienced,<br />

clean the windscreen with washer fluid. This<br />

is particularly important if the car has been<br />

through an automatic car wash, as these<br />

sometimes leave a wax coating on the windscreen.<br />

If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,<br />

fit new blades.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Serious damage can be done to the car’s<br />

electrical system if an alternator lead is<br />

disconnected while the engine is running.<br />

The alternator is situated on the right-hand<br />

side of the engine. It is driven by a poly-<br />

V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 189 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

189<br />

Windscreen<br />

1 Press the two catches together.<br />

2 Hold the wiper arm and move the wiper<br />

blade out and diagonally up.<br />

Fitting the cargo guard<br />

1 Align the wiper arm’s guide lug in the<br />

blade’s corresponding slot.<br />

2 Move the blade in towards the wiper arm<br />

until the two catches grip the blade.<br />

Check that the blade is fitted firmly.<br />

Rear window, Wagon<br />

1 Detach the blade from the arm by pressing<br />

the blade’s mounting from underneath.<br />

2 Install a new blade by pressing the shaft<br />

of the blade in the arm’s mounting.<br />

The washer jet, which is located next to the<br />

high-mounted brake light, is not adjustable.<br />

Washer fluid reservoir<br />

Washers<br />

The reservoir capacity is 5.8 litres.<br />

If the amount of fluid is less than 1 litre,<br />

headlight washing 3 is not activated as a<br />

means of prioritizing washing of the windscreen.<br />

The following message appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Washer fluid level low.<br />

Refill.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 190 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

190 Car care<br />

Headlight washers are only available in certain<br />

markets/variants.<br />

Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water<br />

as recommended by the table on the packaging<br />

to reduce the risk of freezing and to<br />

ensure effective cleaning, see also<br />

page 83.<br />

WARNING<br />

Take care not to spill washer fluid concentrate<br />

onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid concentrate<br />

contains flammable ingredients<br />

such as alcohol.<br />

Changing bulbs<br />

WARNING<br />

Switch off the engine before changing a<br />

bulb in the engine bay. This averts the<br />

danger of fingers and hands being injured<br />

by moving parts.<br />

The radiator fan can cut in even when the<br />

engine is switched off.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Washer jets<br />

The washer jets, which are adjustable, can<br />

be cleaned with a pin if necessary.<br />

Switch off the ignition before changing a<br />

bulb, to avoid possible short circuiting.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 191 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

191<br />

Auto checking of lights<br />

The outer bulbs are monitoring by the car’s<br />

electrical system. If any of these stop<br />

working, a message appears on the DIC<br />

(Driver Information Centre).<br />

Example of DIC message:<br />

Left dipped beam<br />

failure.<br />

Number plate lighting is only detected if both<br />

bulbs fail.<br />

The side direction indicators are only<br />

detected if the lower of the two rear direction<br />

indicator bulbs fails.<br />

Wagon<br />

The tail lights, brake lights and direction<br />

indicators consist of LEDs. If approx. 3/4 of<br />

the LEDs on one side are broken then this<br />

is indicated on the DIC.<br />

If a brake light bulb fails<br />

Sedan: If a brake light bulb fails, for reasons<br />

of safety the adjacent tail light will serve as<br />

a brake light. Replace the defective bulb as<br />

soon as possible.<br />

Wrong bulb fitted<br />

If a dipped or main beam bulb of too high a<br />

rating is fitted, a bulb failure message will be<br />

shown on the DIC (a too high wattage bulb<br />

can damage the reflector).<br />

If the following message is displayed but the<br />

bulb shines, it is most likely that an incorrect<br />

bulb has been fitted.<br />

Right main beam failure.<br />

Note:<br />

When changing bulbs, fit the same type<br />

of bulb (e.g. Long-Life) as that removed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 192 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

192 Car care<br />

Xenon light, dipped beam 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Because Xenon lamp unit is under<br />

extremely high voltage, entrust all work on<br />

the unit, including bulb replacement, to a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Xenon headlights produce roughly twice as<br />

much light as halogen bulbs and have a significantly<br />

longer service life.<br />

The lamp units consist of a gas discharge<br />

lamp containing xenon. When the lights are<br />

switched on a very high voltage activates<br />

the xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full<br />

intensity.<br />

Cars with Xenon headlights have automatic<br />

levelling. The levelling system comprises<br />

two sensors, one on the front suspension<br />

and one on the rear suspension, and a control<br />

unit by the engine bay electrical centre.<br />

Headlight alignment is adjusted automatically<br />

to the car’s load to prevent dazzling<br />

drivers in oncoming traffic.<br />

If the system malfunctions, the following<br />

message will appear on the DIC:<br />

Headlight levelling<br />

malfunction.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop for Xenon<br />

bulb replacement.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 193 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Removing the entire lamp fitting<br />

The entire lamp fitting must be removed<br />

before the bulbs of the position lights,<br />

direction indicators, dipped beam (halogen)<br />

and main beam can be replaced.<br />

Car care<br />

193<br />

1 Remove the upper screw (1).<br />

2 Slacken the lower screw (2), but do not<br />

remove it.<br />

3 Slightly raise the eye where the upper<br />

screw (1) sat while pressing down the<br />

tongue with a screwdriver. Carefully pull<br />

the entire lamp fitting straight forward.<br />

4 Unplug the connector.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 194 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

194 Car care<br />

Installing the entire lamp fitting<br />

1 Plug in the connector.<br />

2 Guide the hole in the lamp fitting over the<br />

guide pin in the fitting retainer and the<br />

tongue into the recess in the lamp fitting.<br />

Then slide the lamp fitting straight back<br />

until the tongue and the upper bracket<br />

engage.<br />

3 Refit the upper screw and tighten the<br />

lower one.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 195 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

195<br />

Dipped beam bulb<br />

Main beam bulb<br />

Dipped beam (halogen) and main beam<br />

1 Remove the entire lamp fitting from the body before bulb<br />

replacement. See page 193.<br />

2 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.<br />

3 Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and take it out of the reflector.<br />

4 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.<br />

Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until<br />

it locks.<br />

5 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.<br />

6 Refit the lamp fitting. See page 194.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could<br />

damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is<br />

not designed to cope with higher wattages.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 196 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

196 Car care<br />

Position light bulb<br />

Direction indicator bulb<br />

Position light and front direction<br />

indicator<br />

1 Remove the entire lamp fitting from the<br />

body before bulb replacement. See<br />

page 193.<br />

2 Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and<br />

take out the bulb.<br />

3 Fit the new bulb.<br />

4 Refit the lamp fitting. See page 194.<br />

Side-mounted direction indicator<br />

1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its<br />

rear end can be pulled out.<br />

2 Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and<br />

withdraw it from the lamp fitting. Change<br />

the bulb.<br />

3 To fit, first engage the two catches on<br />

the rear edge of the lamp fitting with the<br />

edge of the opening. Then press in the<br />

front edge of the lamp fitting so that the<br />

groove in the spring engages the plastic<br />

edge.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 197 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

197<br />

1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.<br />

Lower the air shield.<br />

2 Remove the protective cover. Release<br />

the two spring clips securing the bulb.<br />

3 Unplug the connector.<br />

4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the<br />

glass part of the bulb with your fingers.<br />

Front fog lights 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Sedan<br />

1 Direction indicator<br />

2 Tail lights/brake lights<br />

3 Reversing lights<br />

4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)<br />

5 Centre brake light<br />

• Never crawl under a car that is only<br />

supported by the jack. Always use<br />

axle stands.<br />

• For further information about jacking<br />

up the car, refer to pages 219<br />

and 220.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 198 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

198 Car care<br />

Brake lights, tail lights and<br />

direction indicators<br />

Sedan: If a brake light bulb fails, for reasons<br />

of safety the adjacent tail light will serve as<br />

a brake light. Replace the defective bulb as<br />

soon as possible.<br />

1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the<br />

lights.<br />

Right-hand side: Unlock the plastic<br />

rivet by depressing the centre no more<br />

than 3 mm. Take hold of the collar of the<br />

rivet and pull it out. See also page 198.<br />

2 Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and<br />

take it out.<br />

3 Fit the new bulb.<br />

Reversing lights and rear fog<br />

light, Sedan<br />

Removing the boot lid trim<br />

1 Remove the two screws securing the<br />

grab handle to the inside of the boot lid.<br />

2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in<br />

the centre of each rivet no more than<br />

3 mm. Pull out the rivets by taking hold<br />

of the rivet’s collar.<br />

You can use the button on the handle of the<br />

screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock<br />

the rivets.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 199 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

199<br />

Changing bulbs<br />

1 Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and<br />

take it out.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

To refit the boot lid trim<br />

1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.<br />

2 Fit the trim in place on the boot lid.<br />

3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by<br />

pressing the centre buttons in until flush<br />

with the collar.<br />

Reversing lights and rear fog<br />

light, Wagon<br />

1 Remove the cover.<br />

2 Remove the bulb holder with the broken<br />

bulb. The bulb holder has a bayonet<br />

fitting.<br />

3 Fit the new bulb.<br />

4 Refit the bulb holder and the cover. Start<br />

by securing the cover at the bottom.<br />

Roof lighting, front<br />

1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Insert the guide lugs on the front edge of<br />

the lens and press the lens home.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 200 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

200 Car care<br />

Dome light, rear<br />

1 Remove the entire overhead panel:<br />

ease out the trailing end first, and then<br />

both sides of the front edge.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

Number plate lighting<br />

1 Undo the two screws and remove the<br />

lens.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Make sure the seal on the lens is<br />

correctly seated.<br />

4 Screw the lens in place.<br />

Glove compartment lighting 3<br />

1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting<br />

using a screwdriver.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Insert the connector side first when<br />

refitting the lamp.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 201 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

201<br />

Luggage compartment lighting,<br />

Sedan<br />

The lamp fitting is located under the parcel<br />

shelf.<br />

1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting<br />

using a screwdriver.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Insert the connector side first when<br />

refitting the lamp.<br />

Luggage compartment lighting,<br />

Wagon<br />

1 Pull the lamp housing forward and lift it<br />

out at the front.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb. The bulb is secured in<br />

the holder.<br />

3 Start by inserting in the front edge of the<br />

lamp housing and then pressing in the<br />

rear edge.<br />

Luggage compartment lighting,<br />

(in tailgate), Wagon<br />

1 On one short side of the bulb holder<br />

there is a small slot for inserting a screwdriver.<br />

Prize carefully so that the bulb<br />

holder is accessible.<br />

2 Bend one of the contact plates so that<br />

the bulb can be removed.<br />

3 Fit the new bulb.<br />

To fit, first insert the bulb holder’s short side<br />

with the electrical socket.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 202 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

202 Car care<br />

Other bulbs<br />

If any other bulbs need changing, we<br />

recommend that you visit a workshop. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Courtesy/footwell lighting 3<br />

1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting<br />

using a screwdriver.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Insert the connector side first when<br />

refitting the lamp.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 203 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Bulb table<br />

Car care<br />

203<br />

No. Designation Wattage<br />

1 H7 55 Headlight<br />

2 H3 55 Front fog lights 3<br />

3 P21W 21 Reversing light, brake light, tail<br />

light, rear direction indicator<br />

4 PR21W 21 Rear fog light (red)<br />

5 PY21W 21 Front direction indicator<br />

6 R10W 10 Rear dome lighting, courtesy<br />

lighting 3, glove compartment<br />

lighting<br />

7 R5W 5 Number plate lighting; luggage<br />

compartment lighting, Sedan; luggage<br />

compartment lighting (in tailgate),<br />

Wagon<br />

8 T4W 4 Reading light, rear<br />

9 W5W 5 Side-mounted direction indicator;<br />

position lights; front dome lighting;<br />

luggage compartment lighting,<br />

Wagon<br />

NOTICE<br />

Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage<br />

could damage the wiring harness and electronics.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 204 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

204 Car care<br />

Fuses<br />

WARNING<br />

To avert the risk of short circuiting and<br />

damage to the car’s electrical system,<br />

always observe the following advice:<br />

• We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop before<br />

modifying or connecting any electrical<br />

equipment. Incorrect installation could<br />

damage the electrical system.<br />

• Never replace a fuse with one having<br />

a higher rating than specified, see<br />

page 206. The colour of the fuse indicates<br />

its amperage.<br />

• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,<br />

have the car’s electrical system<br />

checked at a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major<br />

fault in the electrical system. Have<br />

the car checked at a workshop. We<br />

recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The fuses are housed in three electrical<br />

centres: one behind a hatch on the left-hand<br />

end of the fascia, one in the engine bay<br />

(additional small unit in front of battery on<br />

certain variants) and one on the left-hand<br />

side of the luggage compartment. There is<br />

space for spare fuses in the hatch on the<br />

left-hand end of the fascia.<br />

Sound fuse/Blown fuse<br />

To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it<br />

from the panel. If the filament is broken, the<br />

fuse has blown.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 205 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

205<br />

MAXI fuses<br />

The car also has a number of large fuses<br />

know as MAXI fuses. These are designed to<br />

protect the car’s electrical system from<br />

being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a<br />

number of electrical circuits and functions<br />

and therefore has a higher rating<br />

(amperage) than the standard fuses. No<br />

spare MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Electrical centre in end of fascia<br />

A special tool for removing fuses is provided<br />

on the hatch on the left-hand end of the<br />

fascia. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,<br />

squeeze and remove the fuse.<br />

Some of the fuses and relays fitted are not<br />

connected to the car’s electrical system.<br />

If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major fault<br />

in the electrical system. Have the car<br />

checked at a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 206 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

206 Car care<br />

Electrical centre in end of fascia<br />

No. Amp. Function<br />

1 15 Steering wheel lock<br />

2 5 Steering column unit; ignition switch<br />

3 10 Handsfree 3/ Bluetooth Phone 3<br />

4 10 Main instrument panel; manual climate control;<br />

automatic climate control (ACC) 3<br />

5 7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock<br />

(automatic transmission)<br />

6 7.5 Brake light switch<br />

7 20 Fascia electrical centre; fuel filler flap<br />

8 30 Control module in passenger door<br />

9 10 Fascia electrical centre<br />

10 30 Trailer socket 3; electrical socket in storage<br />

compartment between seats<br />

11 15 Data link connection (diagnostics)<br />

12 15 Interior lighting incl. glove compartment lighting<br />

13 30 Accessories<br />

14 20 Amplifier 2 Bose ® Centerpoint ® Surround Sound<br />

System 3<br />

15 30 Control module in driver’s door<br />

16 - -<br />

17 7.5 Road toll 3<br />

18 7.5 <strong>Manual</strong> climate control; fan, parking heater 3<br />

19 - -<br />

20 7.5 <strong>Manual</strong> headlight levelling switch 3<br />

21 7.5 Handsfree 3; brake pedal switch; manual climate<br />

control; clutch pedal switch<br />

22 30 Cigarette lighter 3<br />

23 40 Cabin fan<br />

24 7.5 Airbag control module<br />

25 - -<br />

26 5 Yaw sensor 3


460_OM_MY09.book Page 207 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

207<br />

Rear electrical centre<br />

Rear electrical centre<br />

No. Amp. Function<br />

1–5 MAXI -<br />

6 30 Control module in left rear door<br />

7 30 Control module in right rear door<br />

8 20 Trailer<br />

9 - -<br />

10 30 Left-hand brake light; rear right direction indicator;<br />

right tail light; right reversing light; high-mounted<br />

brake light; trailer lights<br />

11 10 AWD<br />

12 - -<br />

13 - -<br />

14 15 Rear wiper 3<br />

15 15 Seat heating, left seat 3<br />

16 15 Seat heating, right seat 3<br />

17 7.5 Auto dimming rear view mirror 3; rain sensor 3;<br />

sunroof 3<br />

18 15 Sunroof 3<br />

19 - -<br />

20 7.5 Analogue clock; TMC receiver 3<br />

21 7.5 Parking aid system 3; control module, rear doors<br />

22 30 Radio, Navigation 3<br />

23 7.5 Tyre pressure monitoring 3<br />

24 10 Movement sensor 3, tilt sensor 3, siren (alarm 3)<br />

25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory 3<br />

26 30 Right-hand brake light; rear left direction indicators;<br />

left tail light; rear fog light; left reversing light; number<br />

plate lighting; luggage compartment lighting; trailer<br />

lights<br />

27 10 Lumbar support on electrically operated driver’s<br />

seat 3<br />

28 - -<br />

29 - -


460_OM_MY09.book Page 208 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

208 Car care<br />

Electrical centre in engine bay<br />

No. Amp. Function<br />

1 30 Engine management system, diesel<br />

2 10 Engine management system, petrol; transmission<br />

control module<br />

3 20 Horn<br />

4 10 Engine management system, petrol and diesel;<br />

battery disconnect switch 3<br />

5 - -<br />

6 10 Selector lever (automatic); clutch pedal switch<br />

7 - -<br />

8 5 Relay for vacuum pump (brake system) 3<br />

9 - -<br />

10 - -<br />

11 - -<br />

12 10 Washer fluid pump for rear window 3<br />

13 10 A/C compressor, diesel<br />

14 - -<br />

15 30 Washer fluid pump 3, headlights<br />

16 30 Front right position light; front right direction indicator;<br />

left and right side direction indicator; right main beam;<br />

left dipped beam; front left fog light<br />

17 30 Windscreen wiper motor, low speed<br />

18 30 Windscreen wiper motor, high speed<br />

19 20 Parking heater 3; auxiliary heater 3<br />

20 10 Headlight levelling 3<br />

21 - -<br />

22 30 Washer fluid pump, windscreen<br />

23 - -<br />

24 20 Extra lights 3<br />

25 20 Amplifier 1 Sound System/Bose<br />

® Centerpoint ®<br />

Surround Sound System 3<br />

26 30 Front left direction indicator; front left position light;<br />

front right fog light; right dipped beam; left main beam<br />

27–37 MAXI


460_OM_MY09.book Page 209 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

209<br />

Relays<br />

R 1 Washer fluid pump, windscreen<br />

R 2 A/C compressor, diesel<br />

R3 -<br />

R 4 Fuel filter, diesel (preheating)<br />

R 5 Extra lights<br />

R6 Horn<br />

R 7 Engine control module, diesel; injection, diesel<br />

R8 Starter motor<br />

R 9 Windscreen wipers ON/OFF<br />

R10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3<br />

R11 Ignition +15<br />

R12 Windscreen wipers, high/low speed<br />

R13 -<br />

R14 Washer fluid pump 3, headlights<br />

Electrical centre in front of battery 3<br />

No. Amp. Function<br />

1 60 Air pump, secondary air 3<br />

2 20 Fuel pump; preheating, oxygen sensors<br />

3 10 A/C compressor<br />

4 30 Main relay, engine management system<br />

Relays<br />

1 Air pump, secondary air 3<br />

2 A/C compressor<br />

3 Preheating, oxygen sensors<br />

4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injection)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 210 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

210 Car care<br />

Wheels<br />

NOTICE<br />

Wide wheels and tyres with side walls<br />

that are too low can:<br />

• be damaged in potholes, etc.<br />

• cause springs, shock absorbers,<br />

wheel bearings and chassis mountings<br />

to be overloaded<br />

• come into contact with chassis and<br />

body components<br />

• affect the StabiliTrak ® function.<br />

The speed and load limits of the tyres<br />

must not be exceeded; see page 211.<br />

Wheels larger than 18" must not be fitted.<br />

Wheel offset must be 41 mm.<br />

Alternative tyres and wheels<br />

Before changing to wheels/tyres of another<br />

size, we recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop regarding<br />

acceptable options. See also page 241.<br />

Wheel/tyre combinations that are not<br />

approved by <strong>Cadillac</strong> can negatively affect<br />

the car’s directional stability, steering and<br />

braking in both wet and dry conditions.<br />

The wheels and tyres have been carefully<br />

matched to the characteristics of the car and<br />

play a key role in its outstanding roadholding<br />

and handling.<br />

Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tyre<br />

combination will work in the best possible<br />

way, just because it can be fitted to the car.<br />

To ensure that the speedometer is as accurate<br />

as possible, it should be reprogrammed<br />

if wheels of a different size are fitted. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Tyre pressure<br />

WARNING<br />

Check the tyre pressure at least once a<br />

month and before long journeys. Underinflation<br />

can result in:<br />

• punctures<br />

• separation of the tyre and tread<br />

• damage to the sideways<br />

• damage to the rims on poor roads<br />

• poor handling characteristics.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 211 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

211<br />

Note: Low tyre pressure also causes premature<br />

tyre wear and increased fuel consumption.<br />

Tyre pressure should match the current<br />

load and speed of the car, see page 245.<br />

The tyre pressures given apply to cold<br />

tyres, that is they have the same temperature<br />

as the outside air temperature.<br />

The pressure increases approximately<br />

0.3 bar (4 psi) as the tyres become warm<br />

(e.g. during fast motorway driving). When<br />

the temperature of the tyres changes by<br />

10 °C, the tyre pressure will change 0.1 bar<br />

(2 psi).<br />

Never reduce the pressure of a hot tyre. If<br />

the tyres are hot when you check them, only<br />

increase the pressure, if necessary.<br />

Underinflated tyres wear more quickly than<br />

slightly overinflated tyres.<br />

If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit<br />

a new one.<br />

Note: Remember to adjust the tyre pressures<br />

if you change the load in the car significantly<br />

or intend to drive at substantially<br />

lower or higher speeds than normal.<br />

Shifting the wheels<br />

WARNING<br />

When fitting just one new pair of tyres,<br />

these should be fitted to the rear wheels,<br />

as these are more critical to the directional<br />

stability of the car (e.g. on braking<br />

or in a skid). The existing rear wheels<br />

should therefore be moved to the front.<br />

Always move rear left to front left and rear<br />

right to front right, so that the direction of<br />

rotation remains the same.<br />

Because the car has front-wheel drive, the<br />

front tyres tend to wear faster than the rear<br />

ones. New tyres should always be fitted in<br />

pairs, so that tyres on the same axle have<br />

the same amount of tread.<br />

Mark the wheels L (left) and R (right) when<br />

changing between summer and winter<br />

tyres. This ensures that the direction of rotation<br />

of the wheels is the same when they are<br />

refitted. Fit the tyres in best condition to the<br />

rear wheels.<br />

Store wheels either lying flat or hanging –<br />

never standing upright.<br />

Tyre markings<br />

Tyre marking 215/55 R16 93V means:<br />

215 Tyre section width, mm<br />

55 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height<br />

as a percentage of the section<br />

width<br />

R Radial ply<br />

16 16 in. wheel rim diameter at bead<br />

seats<br />

93 Tyre load index<br />

V Speed rating<br />

Tyre load indices<br />

91 Tyre approved for max. 615 kg<br />

93 Max. 650 kg<br />

94 Max. 670 kg<br />

95 Max. 690 kg<br />

97 Max. 730 kg<br />

Speed ratings<br />

Q Tyre approved for speeds up<br />

to 100 mph (160 km/h)<br />

S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)<br />

T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)<br />

H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)<br />

V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)<br />

W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)<br />

Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 212 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

212 Car care<br />

Tyre date code<br />

Tyres should be considered as perishable<br />

goods. As they age, they become progressively<br />

harder, resulting in deteriorating road<br />

grip. This is particularly marked for winter<br />

tyres.<br />

Tyres have a code that specifies their date<br />

of manufacture. The first two digits denote<br />

the week number and the last two digits the<br />

year followed by a filled triangle.<br />

Tyres’ direction of rotation<br />

Direction of rotation is important for most<br />

types of tyre. These tyres have a marking on<br />

the sidewall. The marking can be made up<br />

of the text "Tyre rotation" together with an<br />

arrow or the text "Facing out".<br />

The tyre must have the same direction of<br />

rotation for its entire service life.<br />

Wear indicator<br />

The tyres incorporate so-called wear indicators.<br />

When treadless bands appear across<br />

the width of the tyre surface, only 1.6 mm of<br />

tread pattern remains. This indicates that<br />

the tyre should be changed.<br />

Make sure you are familiar with the legal<br />

limit for minimum tread depth in your<br />

country and also any regulations governing<br />

the use of winter tyres.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 213 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Automatic tyre pressure<br />

monitoring 3<br />

WARNING<br />

The system is an aid to the driver. The<br />

driver always has the responsibility that<br />

the tyres have the correct air pressure.<br />

Never use the system to assist with tyre<br />

pressure reading when adjusting tyre<br />

pressures.<br />

Wear indicator<br />

For optimum safety, economy and comfort<br />

tyre pressures should be checked regularly<br />

even if the automatic tyre pressure<br />

monitoring has not alarmed.<br />

The system consists of a sensor in each<br />

wheel and a common receiver. The sensors<br />

are located inside the tyre in direct connection<br />

with the air pressure valves.<br />

Make sure that wheels with sensors for tyre<br />

pressure monitoring are fitted during<br />

replacement if the car has automatic tyre<br />

pressure monitoring.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Tyre replacement must take place with<br />

great care to avoid damaging the sensors<br />

that are built together with the valves.<br />

• Remove the rear side first.<br />

• Start to remove the tyre opposite the<br />

valve.<br />

• During removal the tyre machine must<br />

not come closer than ±10° from the<br />

valve.<br />

• During fitting, start 20° after the valve<br />

and finish at the latest 20° before the<br />

valve.<br />

• Do not inflate the tyre with pressure<br />

higher than 7 bar (102 psi).<br />

Tyre pressure information is transmitted<br />

wireless to the receiver.<br />

The system checks the tyre pressures when<br />

speed exceeds 30 km/h.<br />

The system is self-programming which<br />

means that the wheels can be shifted<br />

around without any need for adjustment.<br />

The spare wheel has no sensor.<br />

Valve with sensor<br />

Car care<br />

213<br />

The sensor batteries last for 10 years or<br />

around 160 000 km. The battery cannot be<br />

replaced. The whole sensor must be<br />

replaced.<br />

The system does not warn if the tyre pressure<br />

is too high.<br />

If the system has warned or triggered an<br />

alarm due to inadequate pressure then<br />

the pressure must be reset to the recommended<br />

pressure so that the warning/alarm<br />

is cleared.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 214 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

214 Car care<br />

Valve without sensor<br />

If the tyre pressure decreases<br />

If the tyre pressure decreases to 0.4 bar<br />

(6 psi) below the recommended pressure<br />

then a warning is shown on the DIC as to<br />

which tyres are affected.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

front left. Check tyres.<br />

If the tyre pressure continues to decrease<br />

then an alarm is shown on the DIC when the<br />

pressure has decreased below the lowest<br />

permitted pressure which is 1.6 bar<br />

(23.2 psi).<br />

An alarm is also received when leakage is<br />

greater than 0.2 bar/min. (3 psi/min.).<br />

Flat tyre front left.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Reduce speed (avoid heavy braking and<br />

significant steering wheel movement) and<br />

stop the car as soon as possible at a suitable<br />

location. Replace the defective wheel.<br />

The fault message can remain for up to<br />

10 minutes after restarting the car. Then it<br />

disappears if the tyre pressure is correct.<br />

Check/adjust the pressure in the other tyres<br />

when a fault message is shown.<br />

Note that tyre pressure can decrease<br />

without a puncture. The pressure can<br />

decrease approximately 0.2 bar (3 psi) over<br />

a period of three months.<br />

The temperature in the tyre also affects the<br />

tyre pressure.<br />

For further information on tyre air pressure,<br />

see page 210.<br />

Allow 10 minutes for the system to recognize<br />

the wheel/sensors positions after fitting<br />

a new set of tyres. During this period no low<br />

pressure warning or alarm can be triggered.<br />

Adjust the pressure as soon as possible.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 215 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

215<br />

Malfunctions<br />

Tyre pressure system<br />

failure. Contact service.<br />

The above message is shown on the DIC if:<br />

• a wheel without pressure sensor has<br />

been fitted (e.g. spare wheel)<br />

• one, two or three pressure sensors are<br />

broken or missing<br />

• a fault has arisen in the receiver<br />

• a system error has arisen<br />

The above messages are not shown if sensors<br />

are missing in all wheels. It is then<br />

assumed that winter wheels without sensors<br />

have been fitted for example.<br />

Removing a tyre<br />

Remove the tyre with a tyre machine. It is<br />

important to follow the instructions for the<br />

tyre machine as well.<br />

• Do not fit the tyre tool in an area ±10° from<br />

the valve.<br />

• Start removing opposite the valve.<br />

• Remove the rear side first.<br />

Fitting a tyre<br />

Fit the tyre with a tyre machine. It is important<br />

to follow the instructions for the tyre<br />

machine as well.<br />

• Start to fit about 20° after the valve.<br />

• Finish fitting before an area 20° from the<br />

valve.<br />

• Do not inflate the tyre to pressure higher<br />

than 7 bar (102 psi).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 216 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

216 Car care<br />

Spare wheel<br />

Compact spare<br />

WARNING<br />

The spare wheel or punctured wheel<br />

must be stowed under the luggage compartment<br />

floor, and secured in place with<br />

the retaining nut.<br />

The compact spare wheel may only be used<br />

when one of the car’s normal tyres has<br />

punctured. Maximum distance for the compact<br />

spare wheel is approx. 2,100 miles<br />

(3,500 km). The spare wheel, tools and jack (replaced<br />

by tyre repair kit on certain markets) are<br />

stowed under the luggage compartment<br />

NOTICE<br />

floor.<br />

To avoid cosmetic damage to a punctured<br />

alloy wheel, this can be temporarily<br />

placed outside up in the spare wheel well<br />

but only while driving to the closest workshop.<br />

As a general rule, all heavy loads must be<br />

well secured in the luggage compartment,<br />

see page 112.<br />

Sedan: Fold the carpeting forward to ease<br />

access to the tools and spare wheel.<br />

Wagon: The hatch in the floor has a handle.<br />

To raise this, press lightly on the marked<br />

section of the handle.<br />

The screwdriver handle has a "button" for<br />

removing two-stage plastic rivets. This type<br />

of rivet must be removed before replacing<br />

bulbs in the boot lid and right tail light. See<br />

page 198.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 217 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

217<br />

Driving with the compact spare<br />

wheel<br />

The following should be observed when the<br />

compact spare wheel is used:<br />

• Do not drive further than necessary with<br />

the compact spare fitted - the maximum<br />

life of the wheel is approx. 2,100 miles<br />

(approx. 3,500 km).<br />

• Refit the standard wheel as soon as<br />

possible.<br />

Wagon<br />

Wagon with subwoofer.<br />

Position the loudspeaker on the left-hand side before the spare wheel is removed. The<br />

arrow on the loudspeaker must point forwards when the loudspeaker is fitted in the spare<br />

WARNING<br />

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The tyre<br />

can overheat affecting the car’s roadholding.<br />

The tyre pressure should be 4.2 bar<br />

(60 psi).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 218 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

218 Car care<br />

Important considerations when driving with<br />

a compact spare wheel:<br />

• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.<br />

• The car must not be driven with more than<br />

one compact spare wheel at a time.<br />

• Avoid driving against the kerb.<br />

• Do not use snow chains.<br />

• Do not fit the wheel cover as this would<br />

conceal the warning text.<br />

If the car is equipped with a trip computer,<br />

you can use the "Speed warning" function,<br />

since you must not exceed 50 mph<br />

(80 km/h). Tyre repair kit 3<br />

On certain markets, the spare wheel has<br />

been replaced by a tyre repair kit. Using this<br />

repair kit, the punctured tyre can be temporarily<br />

repaired and inflated without having to<br />

remove the wheel. See page 223.<br />

Warning triangle 3<br />

Stow the warning triangle far in on the righthand<br />

side of the luggage compartment.<br />

If the luggage compartment if full, it is easiest<br />

to reach the warning triangle by folding<br />

down the narrow part of the rear seat and<br />

reaching it this way. Folding down the rear<br />

seat backrest, Sedan, see page 110.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 219 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Changing wheels<br />

WARNING<br />

• The car jack is designed solely for use<br />

in changing a wheel or fitting snow<br />

chains. It must not be used to support<br />

the car during repair work or<br />

servicing.<br />

• Never crawl under a car that is only<br />

supported by the jack. Always use<br />

axle stands.<br />

• Special care must be taken if the car is<br />

on a slope – use wedge-shaped wheel<br />

chocks!<br />

• Position chocks behind and in front of<br />

the wheel that is diagonally opposite<br />

the one to be changed.<br />

• Switch on the hazard warning light if<br />

changing a wheel on a road.<br />

• Apply the handbrake and leave the car<br />

in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic<br />

transmission: move the selector lever<br />

to the P position.<br />

• Ensure that everybody is out of the car<br />

before jacking it up.<br />

• Never start the engine while the car is<br />

jacked up.<br />

• If possible, make sure the jack is<br />

standing on a firm, level surface.<br />

• The jack should be stored correctly<br />

under the carpeting in the luggage<br />

compartment. If it lies loose in the car,<br />

it could thrown forward and cause personal<br />

injury in the event of a collision<br />

or if the car rolls over.<br />

• Do not use the jack on a car other than<br />

your <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner<br />

threads if the car has been driven for<br />

several years exclusively with light<br />

alloy wheels.<br />

If steel wheels are now fitted, the bolt<br />

hole threads in the brake hubs should<br />

be cleaned before the thinner steel<br />

wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not<br />

be possible to achieve the correct<br />

clamping force, despite tightening the<br />

wheel bolts to the correct torque.<br />

Car care<br />

219


460_OM_MY09.book Page 220 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

220 Car care<br />

When the car has to be lifted, the jack must<br />

be positioned at one of the four jacking<br />

points (front or rear) under the sill members.<br />

If a trolley jack is used, the jack’s lifting plate<br />

must be positioned under one of the illustrated<br />

jacking points. See page 221. If the<br />

car is equipped with a towbar, the jack can<br />

also be placed under this.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Apply the jack only to the jacking points<br />

indicated on the body.<br />

Marking of jacking points<br />

Jacking points<br />

1 Apply the handbrake and engage 1st or<br />

reverse gear (automatic transmission:<br />

select P).<br />

2 Remove the plastic covers from the<br />

wheel studs using the removal tool in the<br />

glove compartment. Insert the tool over<br />

the plastic cover. Clamp it in and pull<br />

straight out.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 221 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

221<br />

IB4529<br />

Jacking points for a trolley jack Plastic covers and removal tool Clean any rust or dirt from the contact surfaces<br />

between the wheel and brake disc<br />

3 Wind the jack up to a suitable height<br />

before placing it under the jacking point.<br />

Each jacking point is indicated by an<br />

arrow on the sill (see illustration).<br />

Make sure that the jack fully engages<br />

the jacking point in the underside of the<br />

sill member and that the entire foot of the<br />

jack is steady and flat on the ground.<br />

The jack must not stand on snow, ice or<br />

similar.<br />

Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift<br />

the car.<br />

4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of<br />

the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and<br />

lift off the wheel.<br />

5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact<br />

surfaces between the wheel and brake<br />

disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the<br />

wheel hub.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 222 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

222 Car care<br />

Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel<br />

hub<br />

Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin<br />

layer of grease<br />

Tightening sequence, wheel bolts<br />

6 Fit the wheel and screw in the bolts in the<br />

sequence shown (opposite pairs).<br />

Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts<br />

and wheel to be seated correctly.<br />

7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel<br />

bolts to torque in sequence.<br />

Tightening torque:<br />

Light-alloy wheels: 110 Nm.<br />

Steel wheels: 110 Nm.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Do not overtighten the bolts using a<br />

percussion nut tightener: not only can<br />

this damage the wheels but it can also<br />

make it impossible to undo the bolts<br />

using the wheel wrench in the car’s<br />

toolkit.<br />

8 Retighten the wheel bolts after twenty or<br />

so miles.<br />

Tightening torque:<br />

Light-alloy wheels: 110 Nm.<br />

Steel wheels: 110 Nm.<br />

We advise against using wheels with large<br />

ventilation slots in winter, as the brake components<br />

are then more exposed to slush,<br />

road salt and grit.<br />

If you fit wheels of a different size, the<br />

speedometer can be reprogrammed to<br />

ensure it is as accurate as possible. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Driving with snow chains 3,<br />

see page 161


460_OM_MY09.book Page 223 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

223<br />

Tyre repair kit 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure no one can jog the gear lever,<br />

for example, as the engine must be idling<br />

when the tyre is repaired. There is otherwise<br />

a risk of personal injury.<br />

Do not use the repair kit if:<br />

• the damage to the tyre is larger than<br />

4mm.<br />

• the wheel is damaged.<br />

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) after<br />

repairing one of the car tyres with the<br />

repair kit.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Change the punctured tyre as soon as<br />

possible.<br />

Replenish the repair kit at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop. The sealant<br />

canister must be replaced once every<br />

four years. See the date on the canister.<br />

The handling characteristics of the car<br />

may be impaired.<br />

Driving with a tyre that is underinflated or<br />

has a puncture can damage the tyre in<br />

such a way that it is not possible to repair<br />

it with the sealant.<br />

The tyre repair kit replaces the spare wheel.<br />

The repair kit allows a punctured tyre to be<br />

temporarily repaired and reinflated without<br />

needing to remove the wheel.<br />

Minor damage to the tyre, such as a foreign<br />

object that has penetrated the tread, can be<br />

temporarily repaired with the repair kit. Do<br />

not remove the foreign object. Damage<br />

larger than 4 mm and damage to the sidewalls<br />

cannot be repaired with the repair kit.<br />

Follow the instructions supplied with the<br />

repair kit carefully.<br />

If the compressor sounds strange or<br />

becomes abnormally hot, leave it switched<br />

off for at least 30 minutes.<br />

Prevent the compressor getting wet.<br />

The sealant canister can only be used once.<br />

Replace a used canister at a workshop. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The tyre repair kit can be used at temperatures<br />

down to –30 °C. At low temperatures<br />

the sealant is more viscous and so is less<br />

able to seal slightly larger damage.<br />

If a punctured tyre is to be repaired:<br />

• Allow the engine to idle. The compressor<br />

will consume some energy.<br />

• Apply the handbrake.<br />

• Turn on the hazard warning light.<br />

• Position the warning triangle to warn<br />

other drivers.<br />

The repair kit is stowed under the luggage<br />

compartment floor.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 224 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

224 Car care<br />

1 Allow the engine to idle.<br />

2 Remove the repair kit from the luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

3 Remove the electric cable and the air<br />

hose from the compartment on the<br />

bottom of the compressor.<br />

4 Connect the air hose from the compressor<br />

to the connection on the<br />

canister.<br />

5 Insert the canister into the recess in the<br />

compressor.<br />

6 Unscrew the valve cap from the punctured<br />

wheel.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 225 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

225<br />

7 Connect the air hose from the canister to<br />

the valve on the wheel.<br />

8 The switch on the compressor must be<br />

in the 0 position.<br />

9 Connect the compressor’s electric cable<br />

to the 12 volt socket (cigarette lighter) in<br />

the car.<br />

10 Start the compressor.<br />

11 While the canister of sealant empties<br />

(approx. 30 s), the gauge on the compressor<br />

will briefly show a pressure of up<br />

to 6 bar. The pressure will then drop.<br />

12 Once the canister is empty, pump the<br />

tyre to the recommended tyre pressure<br />

(see page 245). It is not necessary to<br />

remove the canister.<br />

13 The tyre should be inflated to the recommended<br />

pressure within 10 minutes.<br />

Switch off the compressor once the<br />

correct pressure is reached.<br />

If the correct pressure is not reached within<br />

10 minutes, the damage to the tyre is too<br />

large to be repaired with the sealant.<br />

Park the car in a suitable place and call for<br />

assistance.<br />

If the tyre pressure becomes too high, it can<br />

be reduced by pressing the button by the<br />

pressure gauge on the compressor.<br />

Do not run the compressor for more than<br />

10 minutes.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 226 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

226 Car care<br />

14 Assemble the repair kit and return it to its<br />

designated place in the luggage compartment.<br />

15 Wipe away any sealant that may have<br />

leaked out with a rag.<br />

16 Put back the warning triangle.<br />

17 Affix the label in the kit showing the<br />

maximum permitted speed so that it<br />

is clearly visible to the driver.<br />

18 Drive off immediately so that the sealant<br />

is distributed evenly around the tyre.<br />

19 Stop after approximately 6 miles<br />

(10 km) or 10 minutes (whichever<br />

occurs first) and check the tyre pressure.<br />

To do so, connect the air hose on<br />

the compressor directly to the valve on<br />

the tyre.<br />

If the pressure is greater than 1.3 bar<br />

(19 psi), adjust it to the recommended<br />

value, see page 245. It may be necessary<br />

to check the pressure a number of<br />

times on the way to a workshop.<br />

If the pressure falls below 1.3 bar<br />

(19 psi), do not drive the car any further<br />

but call for assistance.<br />

The most likely reason for a drop in pressure<br />

is probably that the damage to the<br />

tyre is too extensive to be repaired with<br />

the repair kit.<br />

20 Return the repair kit to its designated<br />

place.<br />

There are four adapters on the underside of<br />

the compressor which allow the compressor<br />

to be used to inflate other items such as<br />

bicycle tyres, air mattresses and footballs.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 227 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Flat spots<br />

All tyres get hot, especially on long journeys<br />

or when the car is driven hard. After the car<br />

has been parked with hot tyres and the tyres<br />

have cooled down, a flat spot can appear in<br />

the tyre, where it is in contact with the<br />

ground. The same can occur if the car has<br />

not been moved for a long time.<br />

Flat spots can give rise to vibration that can<br />

be felt through the steering wheel, similar to<br />

that experienced when the wheels need balancing.<br />

Flat spots of this type disappear once the<br />

tyres get hot again, usually after 10-15 miles<br />

(20-25 km) of motorway driving. A longer<br />

distance is required if the outside temperature<br />

is low.<br />

Seatbelts<br />

WARNING<br />

Never make any alterations or repairs to<br />

the seatbelts yourself. Entrust this to a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

If the car is involved in a collision, the<br />

seatbelts, seatbelt pretensioners and<br />

other components must be inspected at a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Car care<br />

227<br />

Check the function of the seatbelts regularly<br />

as follows:<br />

• Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.<br />

The seatbelt should lock and it should not<br />

be possible to withdraw it further.<br />

Check the anchorage points in the floor.<br />

They must not have suffered rust damage.<br />

There must be no frayed threads on the belt<br />

strap.<br />

Do not expose seatbelts to substances such<br />

as polish, oil or chemicals. If the belt is dirty,<br />

wash it with lukewarm water and a mild<br />

detergent, or have the seatbelt changed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 228 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

228 Car care<br />

Upholstery<br />

To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,<br />

door armrests and headlining, use a<br />

vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a<br />

clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using<br />

a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy<br />

water.<br />

When using a stain remover, always work<br />

from the outside towards the centre to avoid<br />

leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should<br />

remain, it can usually be removed using<br />

lukewarm soapy water or water alone.<br />

Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or<br />

thin oil, must be removed at once with an<br />

absorbent material, such as kitchen towelling.<br />

Then clean with a stain remover.<br />

White spirit is recommended for removing<br />

grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush<br />

may also be used.<br />

Cleaning and caring for leather<br />

upholstery 3<br />

The principal reason for treating leather<br />

upholstery is to maintain its elegant appearance<br />

and to provide it with a protective film.<br />

Discolouration caused by dust and wear<br />

mainly affects the lighter shades, although<br />

this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,<br />

the patina resulting from use is often considered<br />

desirable in leather. But if the leather is<br />

allowed to become too grubby, it can start to<br />

look shabby. Vacuum the leather regularly<br />

with a soft brush attachment to remove<br />

loose dirt and dust.<br />

The leather upholstery should be cleaned<br />

and reconditioned twice a year in conjunction<br />

with spring and autumn inspections. In<br />

very warm, dry climates the leather may<br />

need more regular reconditioning. Use conventional<br />

leather care products. Follow the<br />

instructions on the packaging.<br />

Do not use harsh polishing agents, solvents,<br />

sprays, coarse soap or hot water.<br />

Semi-Anilin is a leather that is dyed<br />

throughout and only has a thin protective<br />

finish and is accordingly more sensitive than<br />

a surface-dyed leather, and it therefore<br />

requires more care to retain the properties<br />

for protection and patination.<br />

Textile carpeting<br />

Textile carpeting should be vacuum<br />

cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be<br />

cleaned using a brush or sponge and carpet<br />

shampoo.<br />

For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that<br />

are not earthed (grounded) must not be<br />

used out of doors.<br />

Washing<br />

The bodywork must be washed frequently.<br />

When the car is new, the body should be<br />

washed by hand using plain cold water and<br />

a clean, soft brush through which the water<br />

flows. Automatic car washes should be<br />

avoided when the car is new. After five or six<br />

months the paintwork will have hardened.<br />

To facilitate cleaning, a suitable detergent<br />

can be added to the water, which should be<br />

lukewarm.<br />

Remove any bird droppings without delay,<br />

as these can discolour the paintwork and<br />

prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet<br />

paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a<br />

minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off<br />

the dirt.<br />

Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit<br />

to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not<br />

use strong cleaners, as these can dry out<br />

the paintwork.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 229 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

229<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Only use liquid detergent when cleaning<br />

the plastic lenses of the front and<br />

rear lights. Do not use mechanical<br />

cleaning. Rinse off the detergent<br />

immediately, otherwise cracks may<br />

form in the plastic lenses.<br />

• The door mirrors should be folded in<br />

before the car enters an automatic car<br />

wash.<br />

• Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.<br />

Wet brake discs reduce the performance<br />

of the brakes.<br />

• Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile<br />

phone, must be removed if the car<br />

goes through an automatic car wash.<br />

• Cars with parking aid system: Do not<br />

spray the sensors or closer than<br />

20 cm to the sensors with a pressure<br />

washer, as this can damage them.<br />

The underside of the car also needs<br />

washing regularly, and this should be done<br />

extra thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean<br />

the underside of the car by hand if the car is<br />

usually washed in an automatic car wash<br />

without special facilities for underbody<br />

cleaning.<br />

Never wash or leave the car to dry in the<br />

sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather<br />

immediately after washing to avoid smears<br />

and streaks.<br />

Clean the inside of window glass using a<br />

proprietary window cleaner. This is particularly<br />

important when the car is new, as<br />

upholstery and trim have a tendency to<br />

sweat a little at first.<br />

Keep the glass well polished, as this helps<br />

to prevent misting.<br />

Clean the outside of the windows with<br />

washer fluid. This is especially important if<br />

the car has been washed in an automatic<br />

car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is<br />

used that can contaminate the windscreen<br />

and impair the performance of the wipers.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.<br />

Wet brake discs reduce the performance<br />

of the brakes.<br />

• Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile<br />

phone, must be removed if the car<br />

goes through an automatic car wash.<br />

• Cars with parking aid system: Do not<br />

spray the sensors or closer than<br />

20 cm to the sensors with a pressure<br />

washer, as this can damage them.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 230 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

230 Car care<br />

Engine bay<br />

The engine bay should be cleaned with an<br />

engine degreasant and rinsed with hot<br />

water. The headlights must be covered<br />

over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid<br />

spraying electrical components and connectors.<br />

Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or solvent<br />

when carrying out repairs or maintenance.<br />

we recommend the use of environmentally-friendly<br />

degreasants.<br />

Waxing and polishing<br />

Do not wax a new car during the first<br />

3-4 months. In fact, there is no need to<br />

polish the car before the paintwork has<br />

started to go dull through oxidation. Other<br />

than in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive<br />

polishes containing a cutting agent on<br />

a new car. Always wash the car thoroughly<br />

before waxing or polishing.<br />

Touching up paintwork<br />

Damaged paintwork should be treated as<br />

soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,<br />

the greater the risk of corrosion. The anticorrosion<br />

warranty does not cover corrosion<br />

resulting from untreated defects.<br />

Paintwork damage sustained in a collision is<br />

usually extensive and can only be properly<br />

restored by professionals.<br />

However, you can repair small scratches<br />

and stone chip damage yourself. The necessary<br />

tools and materials, such as primer,<br />

touch-up paint and brushes, are available<br />

for purchase. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,<br />

where the metal has not been exposed and<br />

an undamaged layer of paint remains,<br />

touch-up paint can usually be applied<br />

directly, after any dirt has been scraped<br />

away using a pointed knife.<br />

If corrosion has already set in, such as the<br />

result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed<br />

knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possible,<br />

the damaged area should be taken<br />

back to the bare metal. The metal should<br />

then be primed with two thin coats of primer<br />

applied by brush.<br />

After the primer has dried, apply several thin<br />

layers of topcoat until the surface of the<br />

repaired area is flush with the surrounding<br />

paintwork.<br />

Stir both primer and touch-up paint<br />

thoroughly before use and allow each<br />

coat to dry before applying the next.<br />

Two-coat enamel<br />

As the name implies, two-coat enamel is<br />

applied in two operations. The first coat, the<br />

base colour, contains pigment, metal flakes<br />

and binder. The second coat consists of a<br />

clear enamel, which give the paintwork its<br />

final gloss and protects the base from moisture<br />

and environmental contaminants.<br />

Touch up stone chip damage as follows:<br />

Thoroughly clean the damaged area, and<br />

then apply the primer, base colour and<br />

finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the<br />

best finish, apply two or three coats of<br />

primer.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 231 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Anti-corrosion<br />

treatment<br />

The entire car undergoes a series of anticorrosion<br />

processes during production.<br />

These include electrophoretic priming,<br />

PVC-based coating to protect against stone<br />

chip damage and corrosion, and treatment<br />

of body cavities and members with thin,<br />

penetrating rustproofing oil.<br />

In addition, most body panels, such as the<br />

bonnet, doors and floor pan are galvanised.<br />

The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts<br />

of the car is constantly exposed to wear and<br />

prone to damage. This applies particularly<br />

to the underside of the car and inside the<br />

wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the<br />

like that are thrown up can give rise to corrosion<br />

where the underseal has worn away.<br />

The extent of this obviously depends on the<br />

conditions in which the car is used.<br />

Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the<br />

underside of the car often and to inspect<br />

the condition of the underseal. The anticorrosion<br />

warranty does not relieve the<br />

car owner of the need to carry out normal<br />

maintenance to the rustproofing and to<br />

make good any damage.<br />

Use a hose to clean the underside of the car<br />

thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or<br />

spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion<br />

agent to any worn or damaged areas, to prevent<br />

the onset of corrosion.<br />

Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has<br />

expired, it makes good sense to continue to<br />

maintain the rustproofing.<br />

Seams in the body, especially those in the<br />

doors and boot lid, are particularly vulnerable<br />

to corrosion from the outside, caused<br />

by grit and salt thrown up from the road, and<br />

to corrosion from the inside, largely as a<br />

result of condensation. Keep the seams<br />

clean and at the first sign of any rust, apply<br />

a thin anti-corrosion agent using a spray can<br />

or a brush. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Car care<br />

Surface treatment composition<br />

1 Body panel<br />

2 Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm<br />

3 Phosphate coating 3–5 µm<br />

4 Cathodic ED 23 µm<br />

5 Intermediate coat 35 µm<br />

6 Metallic base/solid base 11 µm<br />

7 Clear enamel 45 µm<br />

231


460_OM_MY09.book Page 232 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

232 Car care<br />

Service programme<br />

Periodic servicing<br />

All cars need to be serviced and maintained<br />

regularly to provide trouble-free motoring.<br />

We have drawn up a service programme for<br />

your car that takes account of all the attention<br />

it is considered to need at the specified<br />

intervals.<br />

The service programme has been designed<br />

to ensure that your car is properly serviced<br />

and to keep servicing costs to a minimum.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The service intervals have been set to<br />

ensure that the safety, roadworthiness,<br />

reliability and economical running of the<br />

car are maintained, and to meet the relevant<br />

exhaust emission requirements.<br />

Professional services carried out at the<br />

specified intervals (milometer readings) add<br />

to the trade-in or second-hand value of your<br />

car and are a condition of the car’s warranty.<br />

Have your Warranty and Service Book with<br />

you when you leave your car at the workshop.<br />

Upon collecting it, check that the book<br />

has been stamped in the right place.<br />

The scope and content of the service programme<br />

may be changed from time to time.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop, which will always<br />

have the latest particulars applying to your<br />

car.<br />

When it is time to have your car serviced,<br />

the DIC will display the following message:<br />

Time for service.<br />

Materials used in the<br />

car: reclamation<br />

Information on disposal and recycling of car<br />

material is available at<br />

www.cadillaceurope.com.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 233 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Air conditioning (A/C)<br />

WARNING<br />

• All repairs and adjustments to the A/C<br />

system must be carried out at a workshop<br />

authorised for this kind of work.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• The A/C system is pressurised. Do not<br />

break any connections or undo A/C<br />

system components.<br />

• Escaping gas can cause eye injury or<br />

other personal injury.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• The A/C system is designed for use<br />

with R134a refrigerant.<br />

• Refrigerant handling requires special<br />

equipment and special procedures for<br />

charging and draining the system.<br />

• Never mix R134a with other<br />

refrigerants.<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are<br />

a number of checks you can perform yourself.<br />

If the fault persists, however, you<br />

should have the system checked at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Car care<br />

233<br />

Note:<br />

When the A/C system is running, the intake<br />

air is dehumidified. The resultant condensation<br />

that forms on the evaporator is drained<br />

off under the car. When the car is parked,<br />

this may result in a small puddle forming on<br />

the ground. The warmer the air and the<br />

higher the relative humidity, the more condensation<br />

will be produced.<br />

Inadequate cooling<br />

a Check that the controls for temperature<br />

and air distribution are correctly set.<br />

b Check that the condenser (in front of the<br />

radiator) has not become clogged with<br />

dirt and insects.<br />

c Make sure that the compressor drive<br />

belt does not slip, see page 188.<br />

d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans<br />

and compressor, see page 206.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 234 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

234 Car care<br />

Car care and maintenance<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not use a pressure washer when<br />

cleaning the condenser or radiator due to<br />

the risk of damage.<br />

• The compressor drive belt should be<br />

inspected under the regular service<br />

programme.<br />

• Clean away dirt and insects from the<br />

condenser and radiator to prevent clogging.<br />

When washing the car, use the hose<br />

to spray the radiator and condenser<br />

(located in front of the radiator) from both<br />

sides (both from the front of the car and<br />

from inside the engine bay). Do not use a<br />

pressure washer.<br />

Caution: Do not hose down the radiator<br />

and condenser while the engine is<br />

hot.<br />

Other than in extremely cold weather, do not<br />

screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this<br />

will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.<br />

• Applicable to the manual climate control<br />

system during cold months, the air conditioning<br />

should be switched on once or<br />

twice a month and run for 5-10 minutes<br />

during motorway driving once the engine<br />

is warm.<br />

This action saves the gaskets in the<br />

compressor from being spoiled. The<br />

compressor uses a lubricant that circulates<br />

with the coolant.<br />

Note:<br />

The A/C system cannot be switched on<br />

when the outside temperature is below<br />

0 °C. Turn on the A/C system when the car<br />

is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to<br />

always have the AC button pressed in.<br />

The A/C system will then cut in automatically<br />

when the outside temperature is high<br />

enough.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 235 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

235<br />

Technical data<br />

General particulars ____ 236<br />

Engine ______________ 238<br />

Engine oil ____________ 238<br />

Fuel_________________ 239<br />

Engines _____________ 239<br />

Electrical system ______ 240<br />

Brake system _________ 240<br />

Wheels and tyres______ 241<br />

Plates and labels _______ 247<br />

Programmable functions 248<br />

Warnings and<br />

indications that can be<br />

shown on the DIC _____ 249<br />

Auxiliary and parking<br />

heater 3_____________ 252<br />

Mounting points for<br />

genuine <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

towbar 3 ____________ 254<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 236 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

236 Technical data<br />

General particulars<br />

Overall length, including bumpers:<br />

Sedan ___________________________ 4680 mm<br />

Wagon __________________________ 4716 mm<br />

Overall width, including door mirrors _____ 2038 mm<br />

Maximum height:<br />

Sedan ___________________________ 1471 mm<br />

Wagon __________________________ 1543 mm<br />

Wheelbase ________________________ 2675 mm<br />

Track:<br />

Front ____________________________ 1524 mm<br />

Rear ____________________________ 1506 mm<br />

Ground clearance at GVW ____________ approx. 127 mm<br />

Number of seats (incl. driver) __________ 5<br />

Turning circle, measured at vehicle<br />

extremities<br />

AWD-models______________________ 12.2 m<br />

front wheel drive models_____________ 11.9 m<br />

Luggage compartment length, Sedan:<br />

Rear seat raised ___________________ 1036 mm<br />

Rear seat lowered__________________ 1774 mm<br />

Luggage compartment length, Wagon:<br />

Rear seat raised ___________________ 1013 mm<br />

Rear seat lowered__________________ 1777 mm<br />

Gross vehicle weight<br />

(GVW)<br />

Maximum train weight<br />

(GVW + max. trailer<br />

weight)<br />

Maximum axle load,<br />

front<br />

Maximum axle load, rear<br />

The maximum axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.<br />

Permitted load (with driver) = gross vehicle weight – (kerb weight + 75 kg).<br />

The kerb weight (on-the-road weight + 70-kg driver) and load capacity of the vehicle<br />

are specified in the Certificate of Conformity.<br />

VIN plate<br />

Kerb weight:<br />

(i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid<br />

reservoir, standard tools and spare wheel)<br />

Sedan___________________________<br />

Wagon __________________________<br />

Gross vehicle weight (GVW):<br />

Sedan___________________________<br />

Wagon __________________________<br />

1465–1760 kg<br />

1515–1825 kg<br />

2010–2210 kg<br />

2070–2270 kg


460_OM_MY09.book Page 237 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

237<br />

Maximum axle load, front wheel drive<br />

models:<br />

Sedan, front ______________________ 1150 kg<br />

Sedan, rear_______________________ 1010 kg<br />

Wagon, front ______________________ 1150 kg<br />

Wagon, rear ______________________ 1100 kg<br />

Maximum axle load, AWD-models:<br />

Sedan, front ______________________ 1180 kg<br />

Sedan, rear_______________________ 1080 kg<br />

Wagon, front ______________________ 1180 kg<br />

Wagon, rear ______________________ 1140 kg<br />

Weight distribution:<br />

kerb weight, front/rear_______________ approx. 60/40 %<br />

gross vehicle weight, front/rear________ approx. 50/50 %<br />

Max. permissible roof load ____________ 100 kg<br />

Max. luggage compartment load: _______ 80 kg<br />

WARNING<br />

The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded. Note<br />

that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are fitted, the<br />

available load capacity is reduced by the weight of these.<br />

When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure<br />

that it is lashed down securely, particularly when part or all of the<br />

rear seat is folded down.<br />

Trailer weights<br />

Trailer with brakes ___________________ Max. 1600 kg<br />

Trailer without brakes ________________ Max. 750 kg<br />

Recommended towball load ___________ 50–75 kg<br />

Maximum theoretical towing speed,<br />

trailer with brakes __________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)<br />

When towing a caravan or trailer, increase<br />

the pressure of the rear tyres by 0.2 bar<br />

(3 psi).<br />

The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and<br />

weights, see page 163.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 238 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

238 Technical data<br />

Engine<br />

Engine oil<br />

Type<br />

Petrol engine, 2.0 l (2.0t and 2.0Turbo)__<br />

Petrol engine, V6 __________________<br />

Diesel engine, 16v _________________<br />

Swept volume<br />

Petrol engine, 2.0 l _________________<br />

Petrol engine, V6 __________________<br />

Diesel engine _____________________<br />

Four cylinders,<br />

double overhead<br />

camshafts,<br />

16 valves, two<br />

balancer shafts,<br />

dual-mass flywheel<br />

(certain variants<br />

only)<br />

Six cylinders,<br />

4 overhead<br />

camshafts,<br />

24 valves, the angle<br />

between the<br />

cylinder rows is 60°<br />

Four cylinders,<br />

double overhead<br />

camshafts,<br />

16 valves, dualmass<br />

flywheel<br />

1.998 dm3<br />

2.792 dm 3<br />

1.910 dm 3 Information regarding suitable engine oils can be found in the<br />

Warranty and Service book.<br />

Oil capacity, including filter (oil change)<br />

Petrol engine, 2.0 l __________________ 6.0 l<br />

Petrol engine, V6 ___________________ 6.0 l<br />

Diesel engine (TiD) __________________ 4.3 l<br />

Diesel engine (TTiD)_________________ 4.3 l


460_OM_MY09.book Page 239 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

239<br />

Fuel<br />

Petrol engine<br />

Recommended octane rating:<br />

2.8 V6 ___________________________ Unleaded 98 RON<br />

other ____________________________ Unleaded 95 RON<br />

Cars that are adapted for ethanol<br />

operation<br />

Recommended fuel grades___________ E85<br />

(fuel with lower<br />

ethanol content can<br />

also be used)<br />

E85 fuel must fulfil the CWA 15293 or SS 155480 standard.<br />

Diesel engine<br />

Only use diesel fuel intended for vehicle use. Never use<br />

domestic fuel oil, marine diesel fuel or the like. The diesel fuel<br />

must have a cetane rating of at least 45.<br />

Diesel engines must be run on diesel fuel that companies with<br />

the <strong>Europe</strong>an EN590 standard.<br />

Fuel tank capacity:<br />

front-wheel drive models, petrol _______<br />

front-wheel drive models, E85 ________<br />

front-wheel drive models, diesel _______<br />

all-wheel drive models ______________<br />

58 litres<br />

61 litres<br />

58 litres<br />

61 ltres<br />

Engines<br />

2.0t<br />

Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 129 kW (175 hp)<br />

Maximum torque, EEC at 2500–3500 rpm 265 Nm (26.9 kgf m)<br />

2.0 Turbo<br />

Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 154 kW (210 hp)<br />

Maximum torque, EEC at 2500–4000 rpm 300 Nm (30.5 kgf m)<br />

2.8T V6<br />

Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 206 kW (280 hp)<br />

Maximum torque for cars with all-wheel<br />

drive, EEC at 1900–4500 rpm ________ 400 Nm (40.6 kgf m)<br />

Maximum torque for cars with front-wheel<br />

drive, EEC at 1800–5000 rpm ________ 355 Nm (36.0 kgf m)<br />

1.9 TiD 16v<br />

Rating, EEC at 4000 rpm ____________ 110 kW (150 hp)<br />

Maximum torque, EEC at<br />

2000–2750 rpm ___________________ 320 Nm (32.5 kgf m)<br />

1.9 TTiD 16v<br />

Rating, EEC at 4000 rpm ____________ 132 kW (180 hp)<br />

Maximum torque for cars with manual<br />

gearbox, EEC at 1850– 2750 rpm _____ 400 Nm (40.6 kgf m)<br />

Maximum torque for cars with automatic<br />

transmission, EEC at 1750–3250 rpm __ 370 Nm (37.6 kgf m)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 240 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

240 Technical data<br />

2.0t BioPower<br />

Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 147 kW (200 hp)<br />

Maximum torque, EEC at 2500–4000 rpm 300 Nm (30.5 kgf m)<br />

Electrical system<br />

Voltage ___________________________<br />

Battery capacity ____________________<br />

12 V<br />

60, 70 or 85 Ah<br />

depending on<br />

engine variant<br />

Brake system<br />

Foot brake (with ABS and EBD) ________<br />

Handbrake ________________________<br />

Brake fluid_________________________<br />

Hydraulic disc<br />

brakes with vacuum<br />

servo unit. Diagonally<br />

split circuits;<br />

ventilated discs on<br />

front wheels (some<br />

variants also have<br />

ventilated rear<br />

discs). EBD function,<br />

see page 147.<br />

Acts on rear wheels<br />

As per DOT 4 spec.<br />

Do not use DOT 5.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 241 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

241<br />

Wheels and tyres<br />

Summer tyres<br />

6.5x16___________________________ 215/55 R16 93 V,<br />

215/60 R16 95 V,<br />

225/55 R16 95 V<br />

7x17 ____________________________ 225/45 R17 94 W<br />

RF/XL,<br />

225/50 R17 94 W<br />

7.5x17___________________________ 235/45 R17 94W<br />

7,5x18 3 _________________________ 225/45 R18 95 W<br />

RF/XL,<br />

235/45 R18 98 Y<br />

Before changing to wheels/tyres of another size, we recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop regarding<br />

acceptable options.<br />

Winter tyres<br />

6.5x16___________________________ 215/55 R16 93 Q<br />

M+S eller<br />

215/60 R16 95 Q,<br />

225/55 R16 95 Q<br />

7x17 ____________________________ 215/50 R17 95 Q<br />

RF/XL,<br />

225/45 R17 94 Q<br />

RF/XL M+S,<br />

225/50 R17 94 Q<br />

RF/XL M+S<br />

7.5x17___________________________ 235/45 R17 94 Q<br />

M+S<br />

Before you purchase winter wheels we recommend that you obtain<br />

information on the sizes suitable for your car. We therefore recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Compact spare 3<br />

Wheel ___________________________<br />

Tyres____________________________<br />

Pressure _________________________<br />

Maximum life _____________________<br />

Maximum speed ___________________<br />

4x16<br />

125/85 R16 99 M<br />

4.2 bar (60 psi)<br />

2100 miles<br />

(3500 km)<br />

50 mph (80 km/h)<br />

Spare wheel 3<br />

Wheel ___________________________ 6.5x16<br />

Tyres____________________________ 215/55R16 93 V<br />

Pressure _________________________ 2.5 bar (36 psi)<br />

Maximum life _____________________ 2100 miles<br />

(3500 km)<br />

Maximum speed ___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)<br />

Spare wheel 3<br />

Wheel ___________________________ 7x17<br />

Tyres____________________________ 215/50 R17 95 XL<br />

Pressure _________________________ 2.5 bar (36 psi)<br />

Maximum life _____________________ 2100 miles<br />

(3500 km)<br />

Maximum speed ___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 242 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

242 Technical data<br />

NOTICE<br />

Snow chains<br />

Only use snow chains with the following wheel-tyre combinations:<br />

Wheel<br />

Tyres<br />

6.5x16________ 215/55 R16 M+S or 215/55 R16<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop<br />

regarding suitable wheels for winter tyres. Some models have<br />

large brake discs that prevent the use of certain wheels.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop<br />

regarding suitable snow chains.<br />

Snow chains must not protrude more than 9 mm from the tyre’s<br />

tread and its inside.<br />

Snow chains must be tensioned after a short distance.<br />

Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph<br />

(50 km/h).<br />

Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 16".<br />

Snow chains must not be used on the rear wheels.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Snow chains, all-wheel drive models<br />

Wheel<br />

Tyres<br />

6.5x16________ 225/55 R16 M+S<br />

7x17__________ 215/50 R17 95 RF/XL M+S<br />

Cars fitted with the larger brake discs (345 mm in diameter, front)<br />

must have 17" wheels.<br />

Before you purchase winter wheels we recommend that you obtain<br />

information on the sizes suitable for your car. We therefore recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

As there is a narrow space between wheel and wheel arch liner as<br />

well as certain chassis details when snow chains have been fitted,<br />

the following must be observed:<br />

Snow chains must not protrude more than 9 mm from the tyre’s<br />

tread and its inside.<br />

Snow chains must be tensioned after a short distance.<br />

Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph<br />

(50 km/h).<br />

Snow chains must not be used on the rear wheels.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Wheels larger than 18" must not be fitted.<br />

Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the kerb if<br />

the car is heavily laden or when towing a caravan or trailer. This<br />

particularly applies to cars with 18" wheels.<br />

Wheel offset must be 41 mm.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 243 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

243<br />

Recommended tyre/engine combinations<br />

2.0t<br />

175 hp<br />

2.0 Turbo V6 AWD 1.9 TiD 1.9 TTiD<br />

210 hp 2)<br />

Summer tyres<br />

215/55 R16 93 V – – – –<br />

215/60 R16 95 V – – – 3) – –<br />

225/55 R16 95 V – – – 3) – –<br />

225/45 R17 94 W RF/XL – – <br />

225/50 R17 94 W – – – – –<br />

235/45 R17 94 W – – <br />

225/45 R18 95 W RF/XL – <br />

235/45 R18 94 Y – – – – –<br />

Winter tyres<br />

215/55 R16 93 Q – – –<br />

215/60 R16 95 Q – – – – –<br />

225/55 R16 95 Q – – – 3) – –<br />

215/50 R17 95 Q RF/XL – – – – –<br />

225/45 R17 94 Q RF/XL – <br />

225/50 R17 94 Q – – – – –


460_OM_MY09.book Page 244 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

244 Technical data<br />

2.0t<br />

175 hp<br />

2.0 Turbo V6 AWD 1.9 TiD 1.9 TTiD<br />

210 hp 2)<br />

Wheel sizes<br />

6.5x16, steel 3) <br />

6.5x16, aluminium 1) 3) –<br />

7x17, aluminium – <br />

7.5x17, aluminium – <br />

7.5x18, aluminium 3 <br />

RF/XL = Reinforced (eller Extra Load) däck.<br />

1) Gäller endast vissa 16" aluminium fälgar, kontakta en återförsäljare för information.<br />

2) Även 2.0t FLEXPOWER<br />

3) Gäller endast vissa AWD-modeller/marknader. Kontakta en <strong>Cadillac</strong>-verkstad för information.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 245 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

245 Technical data<br />

Recommended lowest tyre pressure, cold tyres<br />

Tyre size<br />

Load/speed.<br />

(km/h)<br />

Front<br />

bar/psi<br />

Rear<br />

bar/psi<br />

Summer tyres<br />

215/55 R16 93 V 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

1–5 pers./160–<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,6/38 2,6/38<br />

215/60 R16 95 V 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

1–5 pers./160–<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,6/38 2,6/38<br />

225/55 R16 95 V 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

1–5 pers./160–<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,6/38 2,6/38<br />

225/45 R17 94 W<br />

RF/XL<br />

1–3 pers/0–190<br />

4–5 pers./0–190<br />

1–5 pers./190–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,8/41 2,8/41<br />

225/50 R17 94 W 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

1–5 pers./160–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,9/42 2,9/42<br />

235/45 R17 94 W 1–3 pers/0–190<br />

4–5 pers./0–190<br />

1–5 pers./190–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,8/41 2,8/41<br />

225/45 R18 95 W<br />

RF/XL<br />

1–3 pers/0–190<br />

4–5 pers./0–190<br />

1–5 pers./190–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,8/41 2,8/41<br />

235/45 R18 94 Y 1–3 pers/0–190<br />

4–5 pers./0–190<br />

1–5 pers./190–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,8/41 2,8/41<br />

Winter tyres<br />

215/55 R16 93 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

215/60 R16 95 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

225/55 R16 95 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

215/50 R17 95 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

RF/XL<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

225/45 R17 94 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

RF/XL<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

225/50 R17 94 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

Spare wheel<br />

125/85 R16 99 M 3 80 max. 4.2/60 4.2/60<br />

215/50 R17 95 W,<br />

AWD-models only 80 max. 2.5/36 2.5/36<br />

215/55 R16 93 V 3 When the spare wheel has the same tyre<br />

size as the car, the car’s load, speed and air<br />

pressure specifications apply.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 246 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

246<br />

Cold tyres refers to tyres that are the same temperature as the<br />

surrounding air.<br />

The tyre pressure values in the table apply at 20 °C.<br />

Tyre pressure will increase as the tyres become warm (e.g. during<br />

motorway driving), and decrease as they cool.<br />

When the temperature of the tyres increases or decreases<br />

by 10 °C, tyre pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease<br />

by0.1bar (10kPa, 2psi).<br />

The speed rating specified in the table is the lowest recommended<br />

speed rating. For speed ratings, refer to page 211.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 247 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Plates and labels<br />

When contacting the workshop it may<br />

sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s<br />

vehicle identification, engine and gearbox<br />

numbers.<br />

1 VIN and barcode, inside the windscreen<br />

2 Gearbox number<br />

3 Engine number<br />

4 Tyre pressure and colour code (body<br />

and trim) label<br />

5 VIN incl. EU approval number<br />

6 Vehicle identification number (stamped<br />

on body).<br />

Technical data<br />

247


460_OM_MY09.book Page 248 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

248 Technical data<br />

Programmable functions<br />

Several of the systems in your car can be<br />

customised to better suit your individual<br />

needs.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Central locking system<br />

Some functions are governed by legal<br />

requirements and cannot therefore be<br />

reprogrammed.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop for information.<br />

Listed below are a number of examples of<br />

programmable functions.<br />

• Audible conformation for<br />

locking/unlocking.<br />

• Standard TSL operation:<br />

The TSL function is automatically activated<br />

when the car is locked with one<br />

press of the button on the remote<br />

control (doors cannot be opened from<br />

inside).<br />

Reprogrammed TSL operation:<br />

The TSL function is activated by pressing<br />

the button twice within 5 seconds.<br />

Pressing the button once locks the car<br />

without TSL (doors can be opened from<br />

inside).<br />

• Automatic unlocking when car stopped<br />

and remote control removed from the ignition<br />

switch.<br />

• Boot lid locked when car driven off<br />

or 30 seconds after being shut.<br />

• The length and sound of audible confirmation<br />

can be altered.<br />

• You can choose whether boot lid unlocks<br />

when doors unlocked.<br />

Follow-me-home<br />

• You can choose the length of time the<br />

lights are on.<br />

• You can choose whether the reversing<br />

light or tail lights should come on as well<br />

as the dipped beam.<br />

Car alarm 3<br />

Listed below are a number of examples of<br />

programmable functions.<br />

• Cabin lighting switched on when the car<br />

alarm is tripped.<br />

• You can choose whether the Audible<br />

signal is produced by horn or car alarm<br />

siren.<br />

• The panic function is also available as an<br />

option on cars without a car alarm.<br />

Automatic climate control (ACC) 3<br />

• To increase the flow of air to the panel<br />

and floor vents, the defroster vents can<br />

be deselected (may desirable in hot<br />

climates).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 249 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

249<br />

Warnings and indications that<br />

can be shown on the DIC<br />

The warnings and indications that can be<br />

shown depend on the engine variant and<br />

equipment level.<br />

The warnings/indications that contain an<br />

exclamation mark are shown together with<br />

a warning or check light in the main instrument<br />

panel.<br />

Symbol<br />

Text<br />

Antilock brake malfunc.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Brake malfunction.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Brake fluid level low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Release park brake.<br />

Oil pressure low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Checkoil level.<br />

xx15<br />

Water in fuel.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Reduced engine power.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Limited performance.<br />

Particulate filter full.<br />

See Owner´s manual.<br />

Coolant level low.<br />

Refill.<br />

Hot engine. Make a<br />

safe stop. Idle engine.<br />

Airbag malfunction.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Use your seatbelt.<br />

Gearbox malfunction.<br />

Limited performance.<br />

Gearbox too hot. Make a<br />

safe stop. Open hood.<br />

Battery not charging.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Headlight levelling<br />

malfunction.<br />

Tap brakes lightly<br />

before using cruise ctrl.<br />

Traction control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Stability control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Washer fluid level low.<br />

Refill.<br />

Rain sensor malfunc.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Key not accepted.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Remote control battery<br />

low. Replace battery.<br />

Number of keys:<br />

Active key number:<br />

Steering lock malfunc.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Pull out key, turn<br />

steering wheel. Restart.<br />

Theft protection failure.<br />

Contact service.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 250 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

250 Technical data<br />

Alarm tripped during<br />

last arming period.<br />

Rear left seat<br />

backrest unlocked.<br />

Rear right seat<br />

backrest unlocked.<br />

Parking assistance<br />

malfunction. Service.<br />

Parking assistance<br />

sensor interference.<br />

Close doors.<br />

Left brake light failure.<br />

Left main beam failure.<br />

Left dipped beam<br />

failure.<br />

Rear fog light failure.<br />

Right brake light failure.<br />

Right main beam failure.<br />

Right dipped beam<br />

failure.<br />

High mounted stop<br />

light failure.<br />

Left front directions<br />

indicator failure.<br />

Left rear directions<br />

indicator failure.<br />

Right front directions<br />

indicator failure.<br />

Right rear directions<br />

indicator failure.<br />

Left side-mounted<br />

direction indicator fail.<br />

Right side-mounted<br />

direction indicator fail.<br />

Left front position<br />

light failure.<br />

Right front position<br />

light failure.<br />

Left front fog light<br />

failure.<br />

Right front fog light<br />

failure.<br />

Left reversing light<br />

failure.<br />

Right reversing light<br />

failure.<br />

Number plate light<br />

failure.<br />

Left rear tail light<br />

failure.<br />

Right rear tail light<br />

failure.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

rear left. Check tyres.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

rear right. Check tyres.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

front left. Check tyres.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

front right. Check tyres.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 251 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

251<br />

Flat tyre rear left.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Flat tyre rear right.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Flat tyre front left.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Flat tyre front right.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Tyre pressure system<br />

failure. Contact service.<br />

Time for service.<br />

Service XWD.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 252 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

252 Technical data<br />

Auxiliary and parking heater 3<br />

Fuel-driven heater<br />

WARNING<br />

• Switch off the fuel-driven heater before adding fuel.<br />

• Never use the fuel-driven heater in a garage or other confined<br />

space.<br />

Cars with diesel engine<br />

In certain markets, cars with a diesel engine also have an auxiliary<br />

heater 3. This auxiliary heater is diesel-driven and starts automatically<br />

immediately after the engine is started if the temperature of the<br />

engine coolant is lower than 75 °C and the outside temperature<br />

below 8 °C. The auxiliary heater helps the engine reach its normal<br />

operating temperature more quickly.<br />

A parking heater addition is available as an accessory for these cars.<br />

This addition allows the heater to also be used as a parking heater.<br />

When the parking heater is running, the following symbol is displayed<br />

on the main instrument panel: . This symbol does not<br />

switch off when the heater is switched off.<br />

Parking heater 3, diesel or petrol-driven<br />

The start time of the parking heater is controlled with the DIC. See<br />

page 253. The climate control system is activated at the same time<br />

as the heater. <strong>Manual</strong> setting, see page 90.<br />

NB! The parking heater uses part of the battery’s capacity. We<br />

therefore recommend that the car is driven for at least the same time<br />

as the heater was running in order to recharge the battery. This is<br />

particularly important in cold weather when the battery is already<br />

under strain. Check the battery state regularly and charge the battery<br />

as necessary.<br />

Run the parking heater at least once a month, even in the summer.<br />

This will prevent the evaporation of the remaining fuel leaving<br />

behind deposits, which can later cause running problems.<br />

The parking heater has a maximum running time of 30 minutes.<br />

If you wish the heater to run for a shorter time, e.g. 15 minutes, set<br />

the start time to 15 minutes before the car is to be used. Heating is<br />

interrupted automatically once the engine reaches a certain<br />

temperature.<br />

The heater will not start if there are less than roughly 10 litres of fuel<br />

in the tank.<br />

When the parking heater is running, the following symbol is displayed<br />

on the main instrument panel: . This symbol does not<br />

switch off when the heater is switched off.<br />

Cars with petrol engines<br />

If the car has a parking heater 3 it also acts as an auxiliary heater.<br />

This heater starts automatically immediately after the engine is<br />

started if the temperature of the engine coolant is lower than 75 °C<br />

and the outside temperature below 8 °C. This helps the engine<br />

reach its normal operating temperature more quickly.<br />

Electric engine heater with 230 V cabin socket 3<br />

The start time of the electric engine heater can be set using the DIC.<br />

This requires an accessory kit. We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

When the electric engine heater is switched on, any 230 V socket in<br />

the cabin is also on.<br />

If a timer kit has been fitted as an accessory:<br />

The electric engine heater has a maximum running time of approximately<br />

180 minutes.<br />

If you wish the heater to run for a shorter time, e.g. 15 minutes, set<br />

the start time to 15 minutes before the car is to be used. Heating is


460_OM_MY09.book Page 253 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

253<br />

interrupted automatically when the engine<br />

is started.<br />

Park Heater 3 and Block Heater 3<br />

If the car has an electric or fuel driven<br />

engine heater, the start times are<br />

controlled in Settings under the headings<br />

Block Heater/Park Heater.<br />

Make the settings within 3 minutes after the<br />

engine has been switched off and the<br />

remote control removed from the ignition<br />

switch. During setting the time is extended<br />

in increments of 30 seconds, if 3 minutes<br />

are exceeded. Otherwise the remote control<br />

must be inserted into the ignition switch and<br />

turned to the ON position until the<br />

text "Checking" disappears. Then the<br />

remote control can be turned back,<br />

removed and the process restarted.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Block Heater or Park Heater.<br />

4 Go back/modify using the CLR button.<br />

To now start the heater, MANUAL START<br />

( heater is switched off)<br />

1 Press the SET button.<br />

2Select MANUAL START.<br />

3 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Go back/modify using the CLR button.<br />

To select the start time, TIMER A, B or C<br />

(heater is switched off)<br />

1 Press the SET button.<br />

2Select TIMER A, B or C using the<br />

steering wheel buttons.<br />

3 Press the SET button. The heater’s start<br />

time can now be adjusted using the<br />

steering wheel buttons. Then press the<br />

SET button, START and the selected<br />

start time is displayed.<br />

4 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Go back/modify using the CLR button.<br />

To switch off the heater when it is running<br />

1 Press the SET button.<br />

2Select OFF.<br />

3 End by pressing the SET button.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 254 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

254 Technical data<br />

Mounting points for genuine <strong>Cadillac</strong> towbar 3


460_OM_MY09.book Page 255 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Index<br />

A<br />

ABS brakes _______________ 146<br />

ACC ___________________ 87<br />

Action in difficult climatic conditions _ 93<br />

Active damping _____________ 144<br />

Adjustment, steering wheel ______ 96<br />

Air filter__________________ 181<br />

Air pressure, tyres _______ 210, 243<br />

Airbag __________________ 34<br />

Airbag system components ______ 34<br />

Airbag warning lamp __________ 41<br />

Alarm___________________ 54<br />

Alarm, DIC________________ 76<br />

Alternative tyres and wheels _____ 210<br />

Anchorage eyes_____________ 112<br />

Angle sensor, car alarm ________ 56<br />

Anti-corrosion treatment ________ 231<br />

Antilock braking system ________ 146<br />

Anti-spin _________________ 148<br />

Arming the car alarm __________ 55<br />

Ashtrays _________________ 107<br />

Autochecking of lights, warning and<br />

indicator lights _____________ 68<br />

Autodimming rearview mirror _____ 101<br />

Automatic climate control (ACC) ___ 87<br />

Automatic transmission ________ 138<br />

Auxiliary heater _____________ 252<br />

B<br />

Battery _________________ 186<br />

Bedding-in of new brake lining____ 137<br />

Before long journeys _________ 172<br />

Belt guide_________________ 18<br />

Bonnet _________________ 174<br />

Boot lid, driving when open _____ 166<br />

Boot lid, opening_____________ 50<br />

Brake fluid, checking _________ 184<br />

Brake fluid, grade ___________ 240<br />

Brakes _________________ 146<br />

Braking _________________ 146<br />

Bulb changing _____________ 190<br />

Bulb table________________ 203<br />

C<br />

Cabin lighting _____________ 105<br />

Calibrating electric windows ______ 99<br />

Calibration, ACC_____________ 93<br />

Can holder _______________ 106<br />

Car alarm_________________ 54<br />

Car transport ______________ 169<br />

Care of air conditioning ________ 234<br />

Cars with a passenger airbag _____ 29<br />

CDC (Continuous Damping Control) 144<br />

Central locking______________ 46<br />

Cetane rating, diesel _________ 239<br />

Changing bulbs ____________ 190<br />

Changing the battery, remote control _ 52<br />

Index<br />

255<br />

Changing wheels____________ 219<br />

Changing wiper blades ________ 189<br />

Charger/Jump starting_________ 171<br />

Charging the battery/Jump starting _ 171<br />

Checking the number of remote<br />

controls _________________ 52<br />

Child safety ________________ 27<br />

Child safety locks, rear doors______ 51<br />

Child seats ________________ 27<br />

Cigarette lighter ____________ 107<br />

Cleaning the engine bay _______ 230<br />

Cleaning upholstery __________ 228<br />

Cleaning, seatbelts___________ 227<br />

Clutch fluid, checking _________ 184<br />

Colour codes, trim and body _____ 247<br />

Comfort closing the sunroof______ 103<br />

Comfort closing the windows ______ 98<br />

Comfort opening the windows _____ 97<br />

Comfort opening, sunroof _______ 103<br />

Comfort opening, windows _______ 97<br />

Compact spare _____________ 216<br />

Compressor, tyre repair kit ______ 223<br />

Coolant _________________ 182<br />

Correct position for seatbelt_______ 17<br />

Courtesy lighting ____________ 202<br />

Cruise Control _____________ 144<br />

Cruise control______________ 144<br />

Cup holder _______________ 106


460_OM_MY09.book Page 256 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

256 Index<br />

D<br />

Date codes, tyres ____________ 212<br />

Deactivating the rear window switches 98<br />

Deep water, driving through______ 166<br />

DIC ____________________ 71<br />

Dimensions and weights________ 236<br />

Direction indicator stalk switch ____ 81<br />

Direction indicators ___________ 81<br />

Donor battery, boost starting _____ 170<br />

Door handles ______________ 46<br />

Door mirrors _______________ 100<br />

Drive belt_________________ 188<br />

Driver Information Center _______ 71<br />

Driver’s seat with memory _______ 24<br />

Driving in cold climates ________ 160<br />

Driving in deep water__________ 166<br />

Driving in hot climates _________ 162<br />

Driving techniques ___________ 158<br />

Driving with a heavy load on hilly<br />

roads __________________ 140<br />

Driving with a load ___________ 166<br />

Driving with a roof load_________ 166<br />

Driving with the boot lid open _____ 166<br />

Driving with the compact spare wheel 170<br />

E<br />

Economical motoring__________ 158<br />

Electric engine heater _________ 159<br />

Electric heating, front seats ______ 93<br />

Electric windows_____________ 97<br />

Electrical centre in end of fascia___ 206<br />

Electrical centre in engine bay____ 208<br />

Electrical centre in luggage<br />

compartment _____________ 207<br />

Electrical system, technical data __ 240<br />

Electrically adjustable front seats ___ 23<br />

Electrically adjustable seats ______ 23<br />

Electronic steering wheel lock ____ 126<br />

Emergency opening the narrow<br />

section of the backrest _______ 113<br />

Emergency operation of the sunroof 104<br />

Engine bay, cleaning _________ 230<br />

Engine bay, diesel engine, overview 9, 10<br />

Engine bay, turbo petrol engine,<br />

overview _________________ 7<br />

Engine heaters__________ 159, 252<br />

Engine immobilizer ___________ 54<br />

Engine number ____________ 247<br />

Engine oil, checking__________ 180<br />

Engine oil, grade____________ 238<br />

Engine temperature gauge_______ 69<br />

Engine, description __________ 175<br />

Engine, technical data ________ 238<br />

Engines _________________ 239<br />

Expectant mothers ___________ 19<br />

Exterior, overview _____________ 5<br />

Extra electrical socket_________ 107<br />

F<br />

Factors affecting fuel consumption _ 158<br />

Filler cap_________________ 135<br />

Filling up_________________ 133<br />

Fitting roof carriers ___________ 166<br />

Flashing the headlights _________ 78<br />

Flat spots, tyres ____________ 227<br />

Floor lighting ______________ 202<br />

Folding down the rear seat ______ 110<br />

Follow-me-home function ________ 79<br />

Frequently asked questions about<br />

airbags__________________ 42<br />

Front fog lights ______________ 81<br />

Front seatbelts ______________ 18<br />

Front towing eye ____________ 167<br />

Fuel filler flap, emergency opening __ 60<br />

Fuel gauge ________________ 70<br />

Fuel grade________________ 239<br />

Fuel-driven parking heater ______ 252<br />

Functions, ACC______________ 90<br />

Functions, car alarm ___________ 58<br />

Fuse table________________ 206<br />

Fuses __________________ 204<br />

G<br />

Gear selector indicator, automatic<br />

transmission_______________ 66<br />

Gearbox number ____________ 247<br />

General information on child safety __ 28


460_OM_MY09.book Page 257 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Glove compartment __________ 108<br />

Glove compartment lighting ______ 200<br />

Glow plug, diesel engine________ 67<br />

Grade, fuel________________ 239<br />

H<br />

Handbrake________________ 152<br />

Hazard warning lights _________ 82<br />

Head protection _____________ 39<br />

Head restraints _____________ 26<br />

Headlight_________________ 78<br />

Headlight flasher ____________ 78<br />

Headlight levelling ___________ 79<br />

Headlight washers ___________ 84<br />

Headlights ________________ 78<br />

Headlights, changing bulbs ______ 193<br />

Heater, fuel-driven ___________ 252<br />

Horn ___________________ 96<br />

Horn button _______________ 96<br />

I<br />

Ignition switch ______________ 124<br />

Immobilizer _______________ 54<br />

Important considerations for driving _ 129<br />

Important information, diesel-engined<br />

cars ___________________ 132<br />

Important information, petrol-engined<br />

cars ___________________ 130<br />

Indicator lights ______________ 62<br />

Inflatable curtain _____________ 40<br />

Initial settings in cold weather, ACC _ 92<br />

Initial settings in hot weather, ACC __ 92<br />

Instrument illumination, adjusting ___ 79<br />

Instrument panel, overview________ 3<br />

Instruments and controls ________ 61<br />

Interior equipment ____________ 95<br />

Interior lighting _____________ 105<br />

Interior rearview mirror ________ 101<br />

Interior rearview mirror with<br />

autodimming _____________ 101<br />

Interior, overview _____________ 6<br />

Intermittent malfunctioning, central<br />

locking__________________ 49<br />

Introduction_________________ 2<br />

ISOFIX, child seat attachment points_ 32<br />

J<br />

Jack ___________________ 219<br />

Jump starting______________ 170<br />

K<br />

Key ____________________ 46<br />

Kick-down _______________ 140<br />

L<br />

Index<br />

257<br />

Labels and plates, location ______ 247<br />

Language setting, Profiler________ 75<br />

Lashing eyes ______________ 112<br />

Laying the car up____________ 154<br />

Leather upholstery, cleaning _____ 228<br />

Lighting __________________ 78<br />

Lighting, changing bulbs _______ 190<br />

Limp-home _______________ 130<br />

Limp-home, automatic transmission_ 140<br />

Load indices, tyres ___________ 211<br />

Load-through hatch __________ 111<br />

Locking a car with flat battery______ 50<br />

Locking/unlocking the car ________ 48<br />

Locks ___________________ 46<br />

Locks and car alarm ___________ 45<br />

Lock-up, automatic transmission___ 140<br />

Long journeys______________ 172<br />

Luggage compartment_________ 110<br />

Luggage compartment lighting _ 106, 112<br />

Luggage compartment lighting,<br />

changing________________ 201<br />

M<br />

Main instrument panel __________ 62<br />

Main/dipped beam ____________ 78<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> closing of sunroof_______ 104<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gear selection _________ 143<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox ____________ 137


460_OM_MY09.book Page 258 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

258 Index<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> tripping of car alarm______ 57<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>ly adjusted front seats _____ 21<br />

Materials used in the car, reclamation 232<br />

MAXI fuses _______________ 205<br />

Memory function, electrically<br />

adjustable driver’s seat________ 24<br />

Memory, driver’s seat _________ 24<br />

Milometer ________________ 71<br />

Motoring abroad ____________ 172<br />

Movement sensor, car alarm _____ 56<br />

Mug holder________________ 106<br />

N<br />

Number plate lighting, changing ___ 200<br />

O<br />

Octane rating, petrol __________ 239<br />

Opening handles ____________ 46<br />

Opening the fuel filler flap manually _ 60<br />

P<br />

Panic function, car alarm _______ 57<br />

Park Brake Shift Lock _________ 138<br />

Park Brake Shift Lock, temporary<br />

override_________________ 141<br />

Parking _________________ 153<br />

Parking aid system __________ 155<br />

Parking brake _____________ 152<br />

Parking heater _____________ 252<br />

Parking on a hill ____________ 153<br />

Particle filter, diesel engine______ 132<br />

Passenger airbag ____________ 38<br />

Periodic servicing ___________ 232<br />

Pinch protection, electric windows __ 98<br />

Pinch protection, sunroof_______ 104<br />

Plates and labels, location ______ 247<br />

Polishing and waxing _________ 230<br />

Poly-V-belt _______________ 188<br />

Position lights ______________ 78<br />

Power steering fluid, checking____ 185<br />

Power steering, checking fluid level_ 185<br />

Priority of audible information _____ 82<br />

Puncture repair kit___________ 223<br />

Puncture, changing wheels _____ 219<br />

Q<br />

Quick guide of LED signals and DIC<br />

messages________________ 59<br />

Quick guide, remote control ______ 47<br />

R<br />

Rain sensor _______________ 84<br />

Rear fog light_______________ 80<br />

Rear seat - fitting a child seat______ 29<br />

Rear seat, folding ___________ 110<br />

Rear towing eye ____________ 168<br />

Rear window heating __________ 90<br />

Rearview mirrors ____________ 100<br />

Recommendations for cars with<br />

automatic transmission, towing a<br />

caravan or trailer ___________ 164<br />

Recommendations for cars with manual<br />

gearbox, towing a caravan or trailer 165<br />

Recommended fuel grades ______ 133<br />

Recommended snow chains _____ 241<br />

Refuelling ________________ 133<br />

Regeneration of particle filter, cars<br />

with diesel engine __________ 132<br />

Remaining fuel ______________ 70<br />

Remote control ______________ 46<br />

Remote control, changing batteries __ 52<br />

Remote locking malfunction ______ 49<br />

Reprogramming lock system functions 52<br />

Reset button, trip meter _________ 71<br />

Retracting door mirrors ________ 100<br />

Rev counter________________ 69<br />

Reversing lights _____________ 82<br />

Roof carriers ______________ 166<br />

Roof lighting ______________ 105<br />

Roof lighting, changing ________ 200<br />

Running-in _______________ 137


460_OM_MY09.book Page 259 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

S<br />

Saab Parking Assistance _______ 155<br />

Safety __________________ 15<br />

SAHR, head restraint__________ 26<br />

Seat adjustment_____________ 21<br />

Seat, electrically operated _______ 23<br />

Seatbelt pretensioners _________ 19<br />

Seatbelt reminder____________ 16<br />

Seatbelts_________________ 16<br />

Seatbelts, care _____________ 227<br />

Seatbelts, checking___________ 227<br />

Seatbelts, rear seat___________ 20<br />

Seats ___________________ 21<br />

Securing a load _____________ 112<br />

Securing loads _____________ 112<br />

Sensor, windscreen wipers ______ 84<br />

Sentronic, manual gear selection___ 143<br />

Service programme __________ 232<br />

Servicing the airbag system______ 41<br />

Setting the alarm time, DIC ______ 76<br />

Settings for difficult climatic conditions 93<br />

Shifting the wheels ___________ 211<br />

Side-impact protection _________ 39<br />

Signalling, horn _____________ 96<br />

Signals when the alarm is tripped __ 55<br />

Ski hatch_________________ 111<br />

Sounds from in-car systems______ 82<br />

SPA____________________ 155<br />

Spare wheel _______________ 216<br />

Speed ratings, tyres __________ 211<br />

Speedometer ______________ 69<br />

SPORT mode _____________ 144<br />

Sport mode_______________ 144<br />

StabiliTrak _______________ 150<br />

StabiliTrak, anti-skid system _____ 150<br />

Starting in cold climates (diesel<br />

engines)________________ 128<br />

Starting the engine __________ 126<br />

Steering wheel adjustment _______ 96<br />

Steering wheel lock __________ 126<br />

Storage compartments ________ 108<br />

Sun visor ________________ 106<br />

Sunroof _________________ 102<br />

Switch on driver’s door _________ 50<br />

Switches _________________ 78<br />

Symbols that can be found in your car 13<br />

System settings, Profiler ________ 75<br />

T<br />

TCS ___________________ 148<br />

Technical data _____________ 235<br />

Temperature control, ACC _______ 89<br />

Temperature zones, ACC _______ 89<br />

Textile carpeting, cleaning ______ 228<br />

Tightening torque, wheels ______ 222<br />

Tilt sensor ________________ 56<br />

Tilt sensor, car alarm __________ 56<br />

Tools and spare wheel ________ 216<br />

Touching up paintwork ________ 230<br />

Touching up two-coat enamel ____ 230<br />

Towbar _________________ 163<br />

Index<br />

259<br />

Towbar load_______________ 165<br />

Towing__________________ 167<br />

Towing a caravan or trailer ______ 163<br />

Towing the car _____________ 168<br />

Traction Control System (TCS)____ 148<br />

Transmission fluid, changing _____ 181<br />

Transmission, automatic _______ 138<br />

Transmission, manual _________ 137<br />

Transporting the car __________ 169<br />

Trip computer_______________ 72<br />

Trip meter _________________ 71<br />

Trolley jack _______________ 220<br />

Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC ___ 233<br />

Tyre date code _____________ 212<br />

Tyre markings _____________ 211<br />

Tyre pressure______________ 210<br />

Tyre repair kit ______________ 223<br />

Tyre sizes ________________ 241<br />

Tyres___________________ 210<br />

U<br />

Upholstery care_____________ 228<br />

Upholstery, cleaning __________ 228<br />

Useful tips on starting _________ 127<br />

Useful tips on starting petrol engines 129


460_OM_MY09.book Page 260 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

260 Index<br />

V<br />

Vanity mirror_______________ 106<br />

Vehicle identification number _____ 247<br />

Vehicle recovery ____________ 169<br />

Viscosity, engine oil __________ 238<br />

W<br />

Warning labels _____________ 11<br />

Warning lights______________ 62<br />

Warning triangle ____________ 82<br />

Washer fluid _______________ 188<br />

Washer fluid reservoir, volume ____ 189<br />

Washer jets _______________ 190<br />

Washers _________________ 83<br />

Washers, headlights __________ 84<br />

Washers, windscreen _________ 83<br />

Washing _________________ 228<br />

Waxing and polishing _________ 230<br />

Wear indicators, tyres _________ 212<br />

What trips the alarm? _________ 55<br />

Wheel change______________ 219<br />

Wheel sizes _______________ 243<br />

Wheels __________________ 210<br />

Wheels and tyres, sizes ________ 241<br />

Windscreen washers __________ 83<br />

Windscreen wipers ___________ 83<br />

Wing mirrors_______________ 100<br />

Winter driving ______________ 160<br />

Winter tyres _______________ 241<br />

Wiper blades ______________ 188<br />

Wipers __________________ 83<br />

Work on and scrapping of airbags and<br />

seatbelt pretensioners_________ 41<br />

X<br />

Xenon headlights ___________ 192


460_OM_MY09.book Page 261 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

Notes<br />

261


460_OM_MY09.book Page 262 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

262 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 263 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

263


460_OM_MY09.book Page 264 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

264 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 265 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

265


460_OM_MY09.book Page 266 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

266 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 267 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

267


460_OM_MY09.book Page 268 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

268 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 269 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

269


460_OM_MY09.book Page 270 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

270 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 271 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

271


460_OM_MY09.book Page 272 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

272 Notes

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!